JP5977709B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a game called pachislot, comprising a plurality of reels each having a plurality of symbols arranged on each surface, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided for each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “start operation”) after a game medium such as a medal or coin has been inserted into the gaming machine, and the rotation of all reels is detected. Output a signal requesting start. The stop switch detects that a stop button provided for each reel has been pressed by the player (hereinafter also referred to as “stop operation”), and outputs a signal requesting the rotation of the corresponding reel to stop. To do. The stepping motor transmits the driving force to the corresponding reel. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output from the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and stop operation of each reel.

  In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, lottery processing using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as “internal lottery processing”) is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter referred to as “internal winning combination”). And the rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the symbol combination related to the winning is displayed, a privilege corresponding to the symbol combination is given to the player. As an example of a privilege granted to a player, a replay (hereinafter also referred to as “replay”) in which an internal lottery process is performed again without paying out game media (medals, etc.) or consuming the game media. An operation of a bonus game in which a game medium payout opportunity increases can be cited.

  In addition, some gaming machines execute an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) during a period in which a predetermined number of games are consumed. “AT” is a function of navigating the establishment (stop display) of a specific small role with a lamp or the like. In addition, as a gaming machine, there is provided an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) that simultaneously executes a replay time (RT) and an assist time (AT), which is a gaming state in which the replay winning probability is higher than normal. There are also things.

  On the other hand, it is easier to display the symbol combination related to the payout of the game medium when the irregular push that first stops the right reel or the middle reel is performed than the first push that stops the left reel first. Is known (see Patent Document 1).

  As such a gaming machine, there is a game machine that allows a game to be played by pressing forward when “AT (ART)” is not executed, and allows irregular pressing while “AT (ART)” is executed. This makes it possible to increase the payout of game media during the execution of “AT (ART)” while reducing the payout of game media when “AT (ART)” is not executed.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machine, if a game is played with an irregular push when “AT (ART)” is not executed, a penalty will be given which will be penalized in the lottery that determines the winning of “AT (ART)”. I am doing so.

JP 2012-200197 A

  However, when “AT (ART)” is not executed, an irregular push is performed to improve the probability that a symbol combination related to the payout of game media is displayed, and a player who intends to obtain a temporary profit Is also present. Therefore, there is a demand for a technique that prevents or suppresses a non-recommended pressing order (irregular pressing).

  An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that can prevent or suppress a non-recommended pressing order (irregular pressing) in consideration of the actual situation in the prior art.

  In order to solve the above problems, the present invention provides a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A loading operation detecting means (for example, a medal sensor 35S described later) for detecting a gaming medium loading operation;
Start operation detecting means (for example, a start switch 16S described later) for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
Internal winning combination determining means (for example, internal lottery processing described later) for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means, the variable display means (for example, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R and three reels to be described later) are displayed. Stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R),
When an operation unit (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R described later) provided for each of the plurality of display rows is pressed by the player, a stop operation detecting unit (for example, described later) that detects the stop operation. Stop switch 17S),
Stop control means (for example, reel stop control process described later) for stopping the change display of the symbol based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means;
A game medium for giving a game medium (for example, a medal described later) based on a symbol combination displayed along a winning determination line extending over the plurality of display lines by stopping the variable display in the plurality of display lines. Granting means (for example, a medal payout process described later);
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in a low RT gaming state (for example, an RT0 gaming state or an RT1 gaming state described later) in which the probability of determining an internal winning combination relating to re-playing by the internal winning combination determining means is a predetermined value, RT gaming state transition means (for example, RT control to be described later) for shifting to a high RT gaming state (for example, RT2 gaming state to be described later) in which the internal winning combination determining means has a higher probability of determining the internal winning combination for re-playing. Processing), and
The internal winning combination determination means, as the internal winning combination, a predetermined number greater than the number of inserted game media (e.g., 12 sheets described later) first predetermined combination of the application of game media (e.g., below "C_C Bell ") and the second predetermined combination (for example, a" C_B bell ") described below, a certain number smaller than the number of inserted game media (e.g., a particular combination of the application of game media later one) (e.g., below "C_Control Bell") and
When the first predetermined combination, the second predetermined combination, and the specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means determines that the stop operation order for the plurality of display columns is the first stop In the case of the order (for example, “middle left and right” or “middle right and left” described later), the symbol combination corresponding to the first predetermined combination is stopped and displayed, and the order of the stop operation is the second stop order ( In the case of “left middle right” or “left / right middle” described later), if the pressing timing of the operation unit with respect to the changing display row is a predetermined timing, the symbol combination corresponding to the second predetermined combination is stopped and displayed. If the pressing timing of the operation unit with respect to the changing display row is not a predetermined timing, the special symbol combination to which no game medium is given is stopped and displayed, and the order of the stop operation is a third stop order (for example, “right and left” described later) During" If a "right middle left"), the symbol combination corresponding to the specific combination is stopped and displayed,
The RT gaming state transition means shifts to the low RT gaming state when a symbol combination corresponding to the specific combination is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line.

  Further, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the predetermined number may be set to be larger than the number of games that is the number of game media to be loaded to play a game, and the specific number may be set to be smaller than the number of games.

In the gaming machine having the above-described configuration, the first stop order that is most profitable by giving a predetermined number of game media, and the second stop that has a lower expected value than that of the first stop order. and order, application of a certain number of game media less than the predetermined number of the third stop order is set to be performed. In this case, the second stop order is set as a recommended stop order, and the first and third stop orders are set as non-recommended stop orders.

As a result, when stopping the plurality of display rows in stop sequence not recommended, it may be not applied only game medium specific speed. Therefore, if it is possible to perform the second game at the stop order that pressing the timing of the operation portion when the predetermined timing a predetermined number of game media is provided, it is possible to recognize the player. Therefore, it is possible to prevent or suppress a plurality of display columns from being stopped in a pressing order (stopping order) that is not recommended.

  In addition, when a plurality of display columns are stopped in a third stop order that is not recommended and a specific number of game media are obtained, the player suffers a disadvantage because the game state is shifted to the low RT game state. Accordingly, it is possible to further prevent or suppress the stop of the plurality of display columns in the third stop order that is not recommended.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent or suppress an unrecommended pressing order (irregular pressing).

It is explanatory drawing explaining the functional flow in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the example of an external appearance structure in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS FIG. 1 shows an internal structure of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and is a perspective view in a state where a front door is opened. It is a block diagram which shows the whole circuit structure with which the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention is provided. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub control circuit in the game machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement | positioning table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table at the time of the bonus action | operation in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of RT transition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for general game states (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table (the 2) for general gaming states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RT3 game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RB1 game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RB2 game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table for RB3 game states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal winning combination determination table for bonuses in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table (the 4) for a small combination and replay in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the internal winning combination determination table for the small combination and replay (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence table | surface (part 1) of the data pointer for a small combination and replay and display combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the correspondence table | surface (part 2) of the data pointer for a small combination and replay and display combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the number selection table for spinning cylinder stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop initial setting table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for the 1st stop at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the control change table at the time of a forward press in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop at the time of forward pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stop table at the time of an irregular pressing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table selection table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the search order table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table A in one embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table B in one embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the game lock lottery table C in one embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the output condition table in one embodiment of this invention. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the subtraction condition table in one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the display combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation stop button storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the pressing order storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the drawing priority order data storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the game lock flag storage area | region in one Embodiment of this invention. It is the transition flow figure of RT state of the gaming machine in one execution form of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination and stop order in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the winning combination, stop order, and RT transfer in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a transition flow figure of the sub game state of the gaming machine in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special flag lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag A-1 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag A-2 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag A-3 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag B-1 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag B-2 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag B-3 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag D lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag G lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag H lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag I-1 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag I-2 lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag J lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery flag K lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 16) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 17) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 18) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the general medium ART stock area distribution lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the general medium ART stock area distribution lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of the stock in the general and CZ in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) at the time of a confirmed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 2) at the fixed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 3) at the fixed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 4) at the time of a confirmed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 5) at the time of a confirmed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of the stock at the time of fixed combination in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 2) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 3) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 4) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 5) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 6) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 7) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 8) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 9) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 10) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 11) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 12) in B_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 2) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 3) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 4) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 5) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 6) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 7) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 8) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 9) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 10) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 11) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART lottery table (the 12) in D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of stock in B_ART and D_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) in unification and G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 2) in unification and G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 3) in unification and G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 4) in unification and G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the art lottery table (the 5) in unification and G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 6) in unification and G_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 1) in R_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART lottery table (the 2) in R_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of stock in G_ART and R_ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (the 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock area distribution lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART bonus lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of ART bonus lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of stock in bonus in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special ART lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the special ART lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table number determination table at the time of special stock in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock non-consumption lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART stock non-consumption lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the stock content determination table of the ART lottery result in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the lottery table of billy touch correct answer / wrong answer at the time of VR lock in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the billy touch lottery table (the 1) in VR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of VR billy touch lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of VR billy touch lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the billy touch lottery table (the 4) in VR in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the VR revolution revolution lottery table (the 15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART precursor game number lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART precursor game number lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART precursor game number lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART precursor game number lottery table (the 1) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART precursor game number lottery table (the 2) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the ART precursor game number lottery table (the 3) in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the title lottery table for the development effects 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production number determination table (the 1) for development effect 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation number determination table (the 2) for development effect 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect determination table for the development effects 1 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the scenario rewriting lottery table (the 16) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the title lottery table for the development effects 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map lottery table (the 1) for development effect 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map lottery table (the 2) for development effect 2 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table number determination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect number lottery table for table number 1 in the one embodiment of the present invention (part 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table for table number 1 (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table for table number 2 (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table for table numbers 2 (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production lottery table (the 1) for table number 24 in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect lottery table for table number 24 (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 1) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 2) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 3) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 4) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 5) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 6) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 7) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 8) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 9) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 10) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 11) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 12) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 13) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 14) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 15) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the map rewriting lottery table (the 16) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the production rewriting condition table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the sub storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the table number and various states in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence table of the loop mode data and loop mode in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a main flowchart which shows the process example of the main control circuit of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery value change process in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game lock lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop initial setting process in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lock process at the time of the game start in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the attraction | saving priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the drawing priority order table selection process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sliding piece number determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 2nd and 3rd stop process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line change bit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the line mask data change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the priority drawing-in control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the control change process after the 2nd stop in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game end effect control process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus completion | finish check process in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the bonus operation | movement check process in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interruption process by control of main CPU in one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main board | substrate communication task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production registration task performed by sub CPU in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production content determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the start command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the lottery flag determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the ART lottery process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process in ART in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the VR related process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the effect determination process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the production rewriting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of the display combination command reception in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the count process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the precursor check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the VR related display process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the process at the time of no operation command reception in one Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, a pachislot machine that is a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS.
In the present embodiment, the winning probability of replay is displayed when an assist time (hereinafter referred to as “AT”) that is a function of navigating the establishment of a specific small role with a lamp or the like and a specific symbol combination is displayed. A pachislot machine having a function of an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as “ART”) that simultaneously operates with a function of operating a replay time (hereinafter referred to as “RT”), which is a gaming state that is higher than usual, will be described.

<Function flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot will be described with reference to FIG.
In the pachislot of this embodiment, medals are used as game media for playing games. In addition to the medals, coins, game balls, game point data, tokens, or the like can be applied as game media.

  When a player inserts a medal and operates the start lever, one value (hereinafter, random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

  The internal lottery means performs lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, a combination of symbols that permits display along a winning determination line described later is determined. The types of symbol combinations include those related to “winning” in which merits such as paying out medals, re-games, bonuses, etc. are given to players, and other so-called “loses”. Is provided.

  Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. Thereafter, when the player presses the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel, the reel stop control means performs control to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. Do. The reel stop control means is responsible for a main control circuit described later.

  In the pachislot, basically, a control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as “the number of sliding symbols”. When the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified period is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding symbols is set to 1 symbol.

  When the internal winning combination allowing the symbol combination display related to winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually displays the symbol combination within the specified time of 190 msec (four symbols) for the winning determination line. The rotation of the reel is stopped so as to display as much as possible. In addition, the reel stop control means is defined for one or more reels when, for example, a challenge bonus (CB), which is a second type special character, and a middle bonus (MB) that continuously activates CB are operated. The reel rotation is stopped so that the combination of symbols is displayed as much as possible along the winning determination line within a time of 75 msec (for one symbol). Furthermore, the reel stop control means uses various specified times corresponding to the gaming state to rotate the reels so that combinations of symbols that are not permitted to be displayed by the internal winning combination are not displayed along the winning determination line. Stop.

  Thus, when the rotation of the plurality of reels is all stopped, the winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the winning determination line is related to winning. This winning determination means is carried out by a main control circuit described later. When it is determined by the winning determination means that it is related to winning, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player. In the pachislot, a series of flows as described above is performed as one game.

  Further, in the pachislot, in the above-described series of flows, video display performed by a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, light output performed by various lamps, sound output performed by a speaker, or a combination thereof is used. Various productions are performed.

  When the start lever is operated, an effect random number value (hereinafter referred to as effect random number value) is extracted separately from the random number value used for determining the internal winning combination. When the effect random number value is extracted, the effect content determining means determines, by lottery, what is to be executed this time from among a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination. This effect content determination means is carried out by a sub-control circuit described later.

  When the contents of the effect are determined, the effect executing means executes the corresponding effect in conjunction with each opportunity, such as when the rotation of the reels starts, when the rotation of each reel stops, or when determining whether there is a winning. In this way, in the pachislot machine, the player has the opportunity to know or predict the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) by executing the production contents associated with the internal winning combination. It is possible to improve the player's interest.

<Pachislot structure>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachi-slot 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachi-slot 1 includes an exterior body 2. The exterior body 2 includes a cabinet 2a that houses a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable.
Handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a (only one handle 7 is shown in FIG. 2). The handle 7 is a recess that is put on when carrying the pachi-slot 1.

  Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 21) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, and a liquid crystal display device 11 showing a specific example of the display device.
The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left end of the door body 9 when the door body 9 is viewed from the front of the pachi-slot 1.

  The liquid crystal display device 11 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and executes an effect by displaying an image. The liquid crystal display device 11 includes a display unit (display screen) 11a including a display window 4 for displaying symbols drawn on the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. In the present embodiment, the entire display unit 11a including the display window 4 is used to display an image and execute an effect.

  The display window 4 is formed of a transparent member such as an acrylic plate. The display window 4 is provided at a position overlapping the arrangement area of the three reels when viewed from the front (player side), and is provided at a position closer to the player (player side) than the three reels. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the three reels provided behind the display window 4 through the display window 4.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation of the corresponding reel provided behind the display window 4 stops, the display window 4 displays three symbols arranged in succession among a plurality of types of symbols drawn on each reel. The size is set as possible. That is, in the frame of the display window 4, upper, middle, and lower areas are provided for each reel, and one symbol is displayed in each area. In the present embodiment, a line connecting the middle stage area of the left reel 3L, the middle stage area of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage area of the right reel 3R is defined as a winning determination line for determining whether or not a prize is won.

  The front panel 10 is attached to the upper part of the door body 9 and is set to a size that covers the liquid crystal display device 11. The front panel 10 is arranged so as to overlap the display unit 11a side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and includes a decorative frame 101 having three panel openings 101a, 101b, and 101c that expose the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11, and a decorative frame 101. A transparent protective cover (not shown) for closing the panel openings 101a, 101b, and 101c of the frame 101 is provided.

  The decorative frame 101 includes a partition piece 112 that partitions the panel opening 101a and the panel opening 101b, and a partition piece 113 that partitions the panel opening 101b and the panel opening 101c. The three panel openings 101a, 101b, and 101c are partitioned by the partition pieces 112 and 113 so as to be lined up and down. Panel openings 101 a and 101 c of the decorative frame 101 expose the display unit 11 a of the liquid crystal display device 11. Further, the panel opening 101b of the decorative frame 101 exposes the display unit 11a of the liquid crystal display device 11 and the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

  Character (billy) decoration portions 22L and 22R are formed on the upper portion of the decoration frame 101. Touch sensors 23L and 23R (see FIGS. 4 and 5) are provided in the character decoration portions 22L and 22R. The touch sensor 23L detects that the player's hand has touched the character decoration unit 22L, and transmits the detection result to a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) described later. The touch sensor 23R detects that the player's hand has touched the character decoration portion 22R, and transmits the detection result to a sub-control circuit 42 described later.

  The decorative frame 101 is provided with a lamp group 21 and a movable decorative unit 121 (see FIGS. 4 and 5). The lamp group 21 is configured by an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like, and turns on and off the light in a pattern corresponding to the content of the effect.

  The movable decorative unit 121 is disposed on the back side of the decorative frame 101 and is usually hidden behind the decorative frame 101. And it moves when a special production and a predetermined production are performed, and becomes visible from the panel opening 101a of the decorative frame 101.

  A pedestal 12 is formed in the center of the door body 9. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with various devices (medal insertion slot 13, MAX bet button 14, 1BET button 15, start lever 16, stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R) to be operated by the player.

  The medal slot 13 is provided for receiving a medal dropped on the pachislot 1 from the outside by the player. The medals accepted from the medal slot 13 are used for one game with the preset number (for example, three) as the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the preset number is deposited in the pachislot 1. (So-called credit function).

  The MAX bet button 14 and the 1BET button 15 are provided for determining the number of coins used for one game from medals deposited inside the pachislot 1. Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a settlement button. This checkout button is provided to pull out (discharge) medals deposited inside the pachi-slot 1 to the outside.

  The start lever 16 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided in association with the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

  Although not shown in FIG. 2, the pedestal 12 is provided with a 7-segment display 6 (see FIG. 4) made up of 7-segment LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes). The 7-segment display 6 digitally stores information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited in the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as the number of credits). indicate.

  At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout port 18, a medal tray 19, speakers 20L, 20R and the like are provided. The medal payout port 18 guides medals discharged by driving a medal payout device 33 described later to the outside. The medal tray 19 stores medals discharged from the medal payout opening 18. In addition, the speakers 20L and 20R output sound such as sound effects and music corresponding to the production contents.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 3 is a perspective view showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot 1.

  The cabinet 2a is formed in a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape with one surface on the front side opened. A main board 31 constituting a main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 4), which will be described later, is provided in the upper part of the cabinet 2a. The main control circuit 41 is a circuit that controls the main operation of the game in the pachislot machine 1 and the flow between the operations, such as determination of an internal winning combination, rotation and stop of each reel, determination of the presence / absence of a prize, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 41 will be described later.

  Three reels (a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R) are provided in the center of the cabinet 2a. Although not shown in FIG. 3, each reel is connected to a corresponding stepping motor described later (any of stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R in FIG. 4) via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. .

  A medal payout device 33 (hereinafter referred to as a hopper 33) having a structure capable of storing a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one is provided in the lower part of the cabinet 2a. In addition, a power supply device 34 that supplies necessary power to each device of the pachislot machine 1 is provided on one side (left side in the example shown in FIG. 3) of the hopper 33 in the cabinet 2a.

  A sub-board 32 constituting a sub-control circuit 42 (see FIGS. 4 and 5) to be described later is provided on the upper portion of the back side of the front door 2b (the part opposite to the display screen). The sub-control circuit 42 is a circuit that controls the execution of effects by displaying images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 42 will be described later.

  Furthermore, a selector 35 is provided at a substantially central portion on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The selector 35 is a device for selecting whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted from the outside through the medal insertion slot 13 (see FIG. 2) is appropriate. To guide. Although not shown in FIG. 3, a medal sensor 35 </ b> S (see FIG. 4) that detects that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 35.

<Configuration of circuits provided in pachislot>
Next, a configuration of a circuit included in the pachislo 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 and 5.
FIG. 4 is a block configuration diagram of the entire circuit provided in the pachislot 1. FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing the internal configuration of the sub-control circuit.

  The pachi-slot 1 includes a main control circuit 41, a sub-control circuit 42, and peripheral devices (actuators) that are electrically connected to these circuits.

[Main control circuit]
The main control circuit 41 is mainly configured by a microcomputer 50 installed on a circuit board (main board 31). As other components, the main control circuit 41 includes a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56, a sampling circuit 57, a display unit drive circuit 64, a hopper drive circuit 65, and a payout completion signal circuit. 66.

  The microcomputer 50 includes a main CPU 51, a main ROM (Read Only Memory) 52, and a main RAM (Random Access Memory) 53.

  The main ROM 52 stores a control program for various processes executed by the main CPU 51, a data table such as an internal lottery table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 42, and the like. . The main RAM 53 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by execution of the control program.

  Connected to the main CPU 51 are a clock pulse generation circuit 54, a frequency divider 55, a random number generator 56 and a sampling circuit 57. The clock pulse generation circuit 54 and the frequency divider 55 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 51 executes a control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 56 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). Then, the sampling circuit 57 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

  Various switches and sensors are connected to the input port of the microcomputer 50. The main CPU 51 receives input signals from various switches and controls the operation of peripheral devices such as stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R.

  The stop switch 17S detects that each of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R has been pressed (stop operation) by the player. The start switch 16S detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation). The settlement switch 14S detects that the settlement button has been pressed by the player.

  The medal sensor 35S detects that a medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 13 has passed through the selector 35. The bet switch 12S detects that the player has pressed the bet button (MAX bet button 14 or 1BET button 15).

  As peripheral devices whose operation is controlled by the microcomputer 50, there are three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R, a 7-segment display 6, and a hopper 33. A drive circuit for controlling the operation of each peripheral device is connected to the output port of the microcomputer 50.

  The motor drive circuit 62 controls the drive of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. The reel position detection circuit 63 detects, for each reel, a reel index indicating that the reel has made one rotation by an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit.

  Each of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R has a configuration in which the momentum is proportional to the number of output pulses, and the rotation axis can be stopped at a specified angle. The driving force of each stepping motor is transmitted to the corresponding reel via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio. Each time one pulse is output to each stepping motor, the corresponding reel rotates at a constant angle.

  The main CPU 51 detects the reel index of each reel and then counts the number of times a pulse is output to the corresponding stepping motor, thereby determining the rotation angle of each reel (specifically, how many reels the number of symbols is). Only managed).

  Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to each stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53. Each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) necessary for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the value of the symbol counter (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 is set to “1”. "Is added. A symbol counter is provided for each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection circuit 63.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, by managing the value of the symbol counter, it is managed how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

  The display unit drive circuit 64 controls the operation of the 7-segment display 6. The hopper drive circuit 65 controls the operation of the hopper 33. The payout completion signal circuit 66 manages the detection of medals performed by the medal detection unit 33S provided in the hopper 33, and checks whether or not medals discharged from the hopper 33 have reached a predetermined payout number. To do.

  The main control circuit 41 is connected to an external terminal board 18S. The main control circuit 41 is connected to the hall computer or the calling device 100 via the external terminal board 18S. Then, when a predetermined internal winning combination is won and a predetermined stop operation order is detected, the main control circuit 41 transmits a jackpot signal “3” described later to the hall computer or the calling device 100.

[Sub control circuit]
As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, the sub control circuit 42 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 41, and performs processing such as determination and execution of effect contents based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. . As shown in FIG. 5, the sub control circuit 42 basically includes a sub CPU 81, a sub ROM 82, a sub RAM 83, a rendering processor 84, a drawing RAM 85, and a driver 86. Further, the sub control circuit 42 includes a DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 90, an audio RAM 91, an A / D (Analog to Digital) converter 92, an amplifier 93, and a movable decoration unit drive circuit 96.

  The sub CPU 81 performs video, sound, and light output control according to the control program stored in the sub ROM 82 in accordance with the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41. The sub ROM 82 basically has a program storage area and a data storage area.

  Various control programs executed by the sub CPU 81 are stored in the program storage area. The control program stored in the program storage area includes, for example, a main board communication task for controlling communication with the main control circuit 41, a production random number value, and determination of production contents (production data). An effect registration task for performing registration, a drawing control task for controlling display of an image by the liquid crystal display device 11 based on the determined content of the effect, a lamp control task for controlling light output by the lamp group 21, and a speaker A program such as a voice control task for controlling sound output by 20L and 20R is included.

  In the data storage area, for example, a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting various effects, a storage area for storing animation data relating to creation of video, and sound data relating to BGM and sound effects And various storage areas such as a storage area for storing lamp data relating to a light on / off pattern.

  The sub RAM 83 has a storage area for registering the determined contents and effects data, a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41, and the like.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 5, peripheral devices such as the liquid crystal display device 11, the speakers 20L and 20R, the lamp group 21, the touch sensors 23L and 23R, and the movable decoration unit 121 are connected to the sub control circuit 42. Yes. That is, the operations of these peripheral devices are controlled by the sub control circuit 42.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 81, the rendering processor 84, the drawing RAM 85 (including the frame buffer), and the driver 86 create a video according to the animation data designated by the contents of the presentation, and the created video is generated by the liquid crystal display device 11. Is displayed.

  Further, the sub CPU 81, DSP 90, audio RAM 91, A / D converter 92, and amplifier 93 output sounds such as BGM from the speakers 20L and 20R according to the sound data specified by the production contents. Further, the sub CPU 81 turns on and off the lamp group 21 in accordance with the lamp data designated by the contents of the effect.

  The touch sensors 23L and 23R detect that the player's hand has touched the character decoration portions 22L and 22R, and transmit the detection result to a sub-control circuit 42 described later. The sub CPU 81 and the movable decoration unit drive circuit 96 drive the movable decoration unit 121 according to the movable decoration unit drive data designated by the contents of the effect. That is, the movable decoration unit 121 is driven when a special effect is performed, and is exposed from the panel opening 101 a of the front panel 10.

<Configuration of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the main ROM 52 will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data (hereinafter referred to as symbol code (in FIG. 6) that specifies the position of each symbol in the rotation direction of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R and the type of symbol arranged at each position. )))).

  In the symbol arrangement table, the position of the symbol arranged in the middle area of each reel within the frame of the display window 4 when the reel index is detected is defined as “0”. Then, in each reel, “0” to “20” corresponding to the symbol counter are set as symbol positions in the order of advance in the reel rotation direction (direction of arrow A in FIG. 6) with reference to symbol position “0”. Assigned to a symbol.

  That is, the symbols displayed in the upper, middle, and lower regions of each reel within the frame of the display window 4 by referring to the symbol counter values (“0” to “20”) and the symbol arrangement table. Can be specified. For example, when the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the left reel 3L is “7”, the upper, middle, and lower regions of the left reel 3L within the frame of the display window 4 are respectively “ Symbols corresponding to “Replay 2”, “Billy BAR” at symbol position “7”, and “Replay 1” at symbol position “6” are displayed.

[Design combination table]
Next, the symbol combination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The symbol combination table defines a correspondence relationship between a symbol combination predetermined according to the type of privilege, a display combination (storage area), and a payout number.

  In the present embodiment, when the symbol combination displayed by the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R along the effective line (center line) matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table. It is determined that the prize is won. When it is determined that a prize is won, the player is given benefits such as medal payout and replay operation. If the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match any of the symbol combinations defined in the symbol combination table, it is a so-called “lost”. That is, in this embodiment, the symbol combination corresponding to “losing” is not defined in the symbol combination table, thereby defining the symbol combination “losing”. Note that the present invention is not limited to this, and the item “losing” may be provided in the symbol combination table to directly define “losing”.

  Various data described in the display combination column in the symbol combination table is data for identifying a symbol combination displayed along the active line. “Data” in the display combination column is represented by 1-byte data, and a unique symbol combination (content of display combination) is assigned to each bit in the data.

  The “storage area” data in the display combination column is data for designating a later-described display combination storage area (see FIG. 46 described later) in which the corresponding display combination is stored. In the present embodiment, 29 display combination storage areas are provided. In the present embodiment, display combinations having the same bit pattern (1-byte data pattern) and having different contents are managed as different display combinations depending on the “storage area”.

  The numerical value described in the payout number column in the symbol combination table represents the number of medals to be paid out to the player. In the combination of symbols to which a numerical value of 1 or more is given as the “paid-out number” data, the same number of medals are paid out.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, when the number of inserted medals is 3, and any one of “C_C bell” to “C_B bell 24” is determined as the display combination, A medal is paid out. On the other hand, when the number of inserted medals is 1, and one of “C_C bell” to “C_B bell 24” is determined as the display combination, 15 medals are paid out.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9, when any one of “C_control bell 1” to “C_control bell 12” is determined as the display combination, the number of inserted medals is one. Even if there are three medals, one medal is paid out.

  In the present embodiment, for example, a display combination related to replay (any one of combinations of symbols related to “C_C Lip 1” to “C_Billy Lip 18” shown in FIGS. 7 and 8) is determined as the display combination. When replaying, replay is activated.

Note that the display combinations related to “R_Bell Transition 2-1” to “R_Bell Transition 3-21” shown in FIG. 11 could not stop and display the symbol combination related to “C_B Bell” on the active line ( This is the role displayed when you missed it. The display combinations related to these “R_Bell transition 2-1” to “R_Bell transition 3-21” are display combinations that trigger the transition of the RT gaming state to the RT1 gaming state described later.
That is, when the symbol combination corresponding to any of “R_Bell Transition 2-1” to “R_Bell Transition 3-21” is stopped on the active line, the RT gaming state is RT1 described later. Transition to gaming state.

[Bonus operating table]
Next, the bonus operation time table will be described with reference to FIG. The bonus operation time table stores data stored in a game state flag storage area (see FIG. 47) bonus end number counter, game possible number counter, and winning possible number counter provided in the main RAM 53 when the bonus operation is performed. It prescribes.

  The game state flag is data for identifying the type of bonus game to be operated. In this embodiment, a big bonus and a regular bonus are provided as bonus game types. The big bonus is called an accessory continuous operation device related to a so-called first type special accessory, and is hereinafter referred to as “BB”. The regular bonus is called a so-called first type special character, and is hereinafter referred to as “RB”. The operation of RB is continuously performed while the operation of BB is performed.

  The bonus end number counter is data for managing whether or not a prescribed number (payout number) that triggers the end of the bonus game has been reached. In the present embodiment, the operation of BB1 that is started when “C_Don BB” or “C_Red 7” is displayed ends when a medal that reaches the specified number “263” is paid out. In addition, the operation of BB2 that is started when “C_BAR” is displayed ends when a medal that reaches the specified number “60” is paid out, and the operation of BB3 that starts when “C_Billy” is displayed. Is finished when the medals reaching the prescribed number “14” are paid out.

  That is, the numerical value defined by the bonus operation time table is stored in the bonus end number counter, and the subtraction is performed through the operation of the bonus. As a result, the operation of the corresponding bonus ends on condition that the value of the bonus end number counter is updated to “0”. In the present embodiment, BB that is started when “C_Don BB” and “C_Red 7” are displayed is managed as “BB1” with the same flag. However, the BB that is started with the display of “C_Don BB” and the BB that is started with the display of “C_Red 7” may be managed by individual flags.

  The game possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games that can be played in the operation of “RB”, that is, the so-called game possible number. The winning possible number counter is data for managing the number of remaining games in which a combination of symbols related to winning can be displayed in one regular bonus (RB) game, so-called winning possible number.

[RT transition table]
Next, the RT transition table will be described with reference to FIG. The RT transition table defines the correspondence relationship between the RT gaming state transition conditions and the transition source and destination RT gaming states.

  In this embodiment, four types of states, RT0 gaming state to RT3 gaming state, are provided as the RT gaming state, which are different from each other in the type of internal winning combination of replay and the winning probability. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, the fact that a predetermined internal winning combination is won, or that a symbol combination related to a specific internal winning combination is stopped and displayed on the active line, etc. It becomes a transition opportunity between.

  Specifically, when “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7” or “C_BAR” is won as an internal winning combination, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT3 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state.

Also, when “C_Billy” is won as an internal winning combination, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is any one of the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state. Furthermore, when the operation of BB1 to BB3 is finished, the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT0 gaming state.
The internal winning combination “C_Don BB” indicates a specific example of a specific internal winning combination according to the present invention, and the internal winning combination “C_Billy” indicates a specific example of a special internal winning combination according to the present invention. Indicates.

  When the symbol combination “C_RT0 Lip 1 to 10” or “C_Control Lip 1 to 4” is displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT0 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is other than the RT3 gaming state and the RT0 gaming state carrying over “C_Billy”.

  In addition, when the bell is spilled, that is, when the symbol combination of “C_Bell transition 2-1-6” and “C_Bell transition 3-1-21” is displayed, the RT gaming state is the RT1 gaming state. Migrate to In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is other than the RT3 gaming state and the RT0 gaming state carrying over “C_Billy”.

  Further, when the symbol combination “C_RT2 Lip 1 to 12” is displayed, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state. In this case, the transition source (the RT gaming state before the transition) is other than the RT3 gaming state and the RT0 gaming state carrying over “C_Billy”.

  In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) refers to the RT transition table to control the transition of the RT gaming state. For details of the transition flow of the RT gaming state, More specific description will be given later with reference to FIG.

[Internal lottery table determination table]
Next, the internal lottery table determination table will be described with reference to FIG. The internal lottery table determination table defines a correspondence relationship between the gaming state, the number of inserted medals, the internal lottery table, and the number of lotteries.

  Specifically, when in the general gaming state (the number of inserted medals is “3”), the internal lottery table for the general gaming state is used, and “54” is set as the number of lotteries. When it is in the RB1 gaming state (the number of inserted medals is “3”), the internal lottery table for the RB1 gaming state is used, and “8” is set as the number of lotteries. When in the RB2 gaming state (the number of inserted medals is “3”), the internal lottery table for the RB2 gaming state is used, and “8” is set as the number of lotteries. In the RB3 gaming state (the number of inserted medals is “1”), the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state is used, and “6” is set as the number of lotteries.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, an internal lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal lottery table includes a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer associated with a winning number in each RT gaming state and each RB gaming state, and a lottery value when each winning number is determined. Define the correspondence.

  The small role / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer are data obtained as a result of lottery performed with reference to the internal lottery table, and are defined by an internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 23 to 28) described later. This is data for designating the designated internal winning combination.

  In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, random numbers extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined according to each winning number. And then. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). In other words, the winning number when the result of the subtraction becomes negative (“digit” occurs) is won, and the data point assigned to the winning number is acquired.

  Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data (that is, the data pointer) to which it is assigned is determined. The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “the lottery value corresponding to each winning number / the number of all random numbers that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)”.

  15 and 16 show a general gaming state internal lottery table (RT0). The internal lottery table for the general gaming state is a table that is referred to when the player is in the RT0 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers 1 to 54.

  In the present embodiment, lottery values are defined according to settings 1 to 6. These settings 1 to 6 are provided in order to adjust the expected value of internal winnings such as bonuses and small roles at the game store side. For example, a reset switch (not shown) and a setting key type switch (not shown) It is changed using.

  For example, referring to the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the probability that the winning number “2” (abbreviation “F_don BB + F_weak ice”) in setting 6 is 22/65536. When the winning number “2” is won, “10” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, and “1” is acquired as the bonus data pointer.

  The small character / replay data pointer “10” corresponds to the abbreviation “F_weak ice”, and the bonus data pointer “1” corresponds to the abbreviation “F_don BB”. Therefore, the winning number “2” from which the small role / replay data pointer “10” and the bonus data pointer “1” are acquired corresponds to the abbreviation “F_don BB + F_weak ice”.

  Also, in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state, the lottery values of the winning numbers “37” (abbreviation “F_RT2 transition lip 213”) to “40” (abbreviation “F_RT2 transition lip 321”) are “0”. Therefore, when referring to the internal lottery table for general gaming state, the winning numbers “37” to “40” are not won.

  When the winning numbers “37” to “40” are won, “5” to “8” are acquired as the data pointers for the small role / replay, and the internal winning combination relating to “C_RT2 Lip 1 to 12” is determined. (See FIGS. 24 and 25 described later). Therefore, in the RT0 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to “C_RT2 lip 1 to 12” is not determined, and the RT0 gaming state is not shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 17 shows an internal lottery table for RT1 gaming state. The RT1 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT1 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “33” to “41”. When in the RT1 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “33” to “41” in the general gaming state internal lottery table (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table. The lottery value is determined according to the winning numbers “33” to “41”.

  For example, in the RT1 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “37” to “40” are “2240”, respectively. As described above, when any of the small role / replay data pointers “5” to “8” defined according to the winning numbers “37” to “40” is acquired, “C_RT2 Lip 1 to 12” is acquired. Internal winning combination related to is determined. Therefore, in the RT1 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to “C_RT2 Lip 1 to 12” may be determined, and the RT1 gaming state may be changed to the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 18 shows an internal lottery table for RT2 gaming state. The RT2 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT2 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “33” to “41”. In the RT2 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “33” to “41” in the general gaming state internal lottery table (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table. The lottery value is determined according to the winning numbers “33” to “41”.

  For example, in the RT2 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “34” to “36” are “3500”, respectively. When any of the small combination / replay data pointers “2” to “4” defined according to the winning numbers “34” to “36” is acquired, the internal winning combination related to “C_RT0 Lip 1 to 10” is acquired. Is determined. Therefore, in the RT2 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination relating to “C_RT0 Lip 1 to 10” may be determined, and the RT2 gaming state may be shifted to the RT0 gaming state.

  FIG. 19 shows an internal lottery table for RT3 gaming state. The RT3 gaming state internal lottery table is a table that is referred to in the RT3 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “33” to “41”. In the RT3 gaming state, the lottery value defined according to the winning numbers “33” to “41” of the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIGS. 15 and 16) is the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table. The lottery value is determined according to the winning numbers “33” to “41”.

  For example, in the RT3 gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values of the winning numbers “34” to “40” are “200”, respectively. When any of the small combination / replay data pointers “2” to “4” defined according to the winning numbers “34” to “36” is acquired, the internal winning combination related to “C_RT0 Lip 1 to 10” is acquired. Is determined.

  When any of the small role / replay data pointers “5” to “8” defined according to the winning numbers “37” to “40” is acquired, the internals related to “C_RT2 Lips 1 to 12” are acquired. The winning role will be decided. Therefore, in the RT3 gaming state, there is a possibility that the internal winning combination relating to “C_RT0 Lip 1 to 10” and the internal winning combination relating to “C_RT2 Lip 1 to 12” are determined. In the case of the RT3 gaming state, even if the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination related to “C_RT0 Lip 1 to 10” or the internal winning combination related to “C_RT2 Lip 1 to 12” is displayed, the RT3 gaming state There is no transition to the RT0 gaming state or the RT2 gaming state.

  FIG. 20 shows an internal lottery table for the RB1 gaming state. This internal lottery table for RB1 gaming state is a table that is referred to in the RB1 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “8”. For example, when referring to the internal lottery table for the RB1 gaming state, the probability that the winning number “1” (abbreviation “F_BB all bells”) is won is 42300/65536. When the winning number “1” is won, “25” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer.

  In the RB1 gaming state internal lottery table, the sum of lottery values defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “8” is “65536”. That is, in the RB1 gaming state, the internal winning combination related to the bell is always won.

  FIG. 21 shows an internal lottery table for RB2 gaming state. The internal lottery table for RB2 gaming state is a table that is referred to in the RB2 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “8”. For example, when referring to the internal lottery table for the RB2 gaming state, the probability that the winning number “1” (abbreviation “F_BB all bells”) is won is 65536/65536. That is, in the RB2 gaming state, the winning number “1” is always won, and “25” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer.

  FIG. 22 shows an internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state. This internal lottery table for RB3 gaming state is a table that is referred to in the RB3 gaming state, and defines lottery values and data pointers according to the winning numbers “1” to “6”. For example, when referring to the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state, the probability that the winning number “1” (abbreviated as “F_Billy S Bell”) is 15930/65536. When the winning number “1” is won, “33” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer.

In the RB3 gaming state internal lottery table, the sum of lottery values defined according to the winning numbers “1” to “6” is “64512”. That is, in the RB1 gaming state, the internal winning combination relating to the bell is won with a probability of 64512/65536, and it becomes “lost” with a probability of 1024/65536.

[Internal winning combination determination table]
Next, an internal winning combination determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. The internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the data pointer and the internal winning combination. That is, when the small combination / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer are determined, the internal winning combination is uniquely acquired.

  The “internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table is data for identifying a combination of symbols on the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R that is permitted to be displayed along the active line. The “internal winning combination” is represented by 1-byte data in the same manner as the “display combination” in the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 7 to 11, and is a unique symbol for each bit in the 1-byte data. Are assigned. The “O” mark in the internal winning combination determination table indicates the internal winning combination to be won in the acquired data pointer.

  When the small combination / replay data pointer and bonus data pointer are “0”, the content of the “internal winning combination” is “lost”, which is the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. Indicates that display of all symbol combinations specified by is not permitted.

  FIG. 23 shows a bonus internal winning combination determination table. The bonus internal winning combination determination table defines internal winning combinations related to the operation of the bonus game with respect to bonus data pointers “1” to “4”. That is, the bonus internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the bonus data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the operation of the bonus game. As shown in FIG. 23, for example, when “2” is acquired as the bonus data pointer, “C_Red 7” is won as the internal winning combination.

  24 to 28 show a small combination / replay internal winning combination determination table. The small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines internal winning combinations related to small winning combination and replay (replay) with respect to “1” to “38” of the small winning combination / replay data pointer. That is, the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table defines the correspondence between the small winning combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination related to the payout of medals or the internal winning combination related to the operation of the replay.

  FIG. 29 and FIG. 30 show a correspondence table between the small combination / replay data pointer and the internal winning combination. This correspondence table defines a correspondence relationship between a small combination / replay data pointer, an abbreviation, and an internal winning combination.

  For example, when “2” is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay, “C_C Lip 1” to “C_C Lip 12”, “C_T Lip 1” to “C_T Lip 8”, “C_CU Lip 1” to “C_CU Lip 8” and “C_RT0 Lip 1” to “C_RT0 Lip 10” are duplicated.

  Further, for example, when “21” is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay, “C_C bell”, “C_B bell 5”, “C_B bell 14”, “C_B bell 21” are used as the internal winning combination. , “C_Control Bell 1” to “C_Control Bell 12”, “R_Bell Transition 2-1” to “R_Bell Transition 2-6” and “R_Bell Transition 3-1” to “R_Bell Transition” “3-21” will be duplicated.

[Cylinder stop number selection table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 31, the rotating cylinder stop number selection table will be described. The rotation stop number selection table defines the correspondence between the small role / replay data pointer and the rotation stop number. The rotation stop number is data used when acquiring various data required in the reel stop initial setting process described later.

  The rotation stop number selection table of the present embodiment defines a different rotation stop number for each small role / replay data pointer. For example, when the data pointer for the small role / replay is “3”, the spinning stop number “3” is selected.

  In addition, although the number selection table for rotation stop of this embodiment prescribes | regulates a different rotation stop number for every data pointer for small roles and replays, this invention is not limited to this. In the spinning stop number selection table according to the present invention, the same spinning stop number may be defined for different small role / replay data pointers to reduce data.

[Reel stop initial setting table]
Next, the reel stop initial setting table will be described with reference to FIG. The reel stop initial setting table defines a correspondence relationship between the rotation stop number and various data used in a pull-in priority table selection process described later and a number of sliding pieces determination process of each reel described later. Specifically, the reel stop initial setting table includes the rotation stop number, the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the forward push table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push push The correspondence relationship between the table change initial data and the table selection data at the time of irregular pressing is defined.

  The pull-in priority table selection table number and the pull-in priority table number are data used for the pull-in priority table selection process. For example, in the reel stop initial setting table, if a pull-in priority table number corresponding to the spinning stop number is defined, it corresponds to the pull-in priority table number defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 38). Data relating to the priority order of the display combination can be acquired.

  If the drawing priority table number corresponding to the reel stop number is not defined in the reel stop initial setting table, the drawing priority table selection is made with reference to the drawing priority table selection table (see FIG. 37). A pull-in priority table number corresponding to the table number is determined.

  The forward selection table selection data, the forward push table change data, and the forward push table change initial data are used to specify a stop table (see FIGS. 33 to 35) to be referred to when the forward push is performed. It is data. Note that the “forward push” in the present embodiment is a stop operation when the first stop operation (first stop operation) is performed on the left reel 3L. Corresponds to the order of pressing “Right” and “Middle”.

  The irregular pressing table selection data is data for designating a stop table (see FIG. 36) to be referred to when irregular pressing is performed. In this embodiment, “anomalous push” is a stop operation when the first stop operation is performed on the middle reel 3C or the right reel 3R, and is “middle left / right”, “middle right / left”, “middle right”. This corresponds to the pressing order of “left” and “middle right”.

  In the present embodiment, basically, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped within 190 msec. Specifically, one of the number of sliding symbols “0” to “4” is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value obtained corresponds to the value obtained. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the reel rotation stops (this is referred to as “scheduled stop position”). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel starts to be stopped, and this is referred to as a “stop start position”.

  In other words, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. In other words, the number of symbols passing through the middle stage area of the corresponding reel of the display window 4 in the period from when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S until the rotation of the corresponding reel stops. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch 17S.

  Referring to the stop table, the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is a tentative one, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the planned stop position of the reel.

  In the present embodiment, when there is an appropriate number of sliding pieces than the number of sliding pieces acquired based on a stop table described later (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), a pull-in priority table described later The number of sliding pieces is changed with reference to (see FIG. 38). The sliding piece number determination data is referred to in order to determine a search order when the priorities are compared for each of the symbols from the stop start position to the 4th symbol position that is the maximum number of sliding symbols.

  In the present embodiment, the stop table to be referenced is properly used according to the forward push and the irregular push. In the case of the forward push, the first stop table (see FIG. 33) at the time of the forward push and the second and third stop stop tables (see FIG. 35) at the time of the forward push. On the other hand, in the case of irregular pressing, the irregular pressing stop table (see FIG. 36) is referred to.

[Stop table for first stop when pushing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the first stop table for forward pressing will be described. The first stop table for forward pressing shown in FIG. 33 is referred to when the table selection data for forward pressing is “01”. The first stop table at the time of forward pressing defines the correspondence relationship between the stop start positions “0” to “20” of the left reel 3L, the number of sliding pieces determination data, and the change status.

  For example, if the stop start position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the number-of-sliding piece determination data is “0”, and the change status is “1”. The change status is used when referring to a forward pressing control change table (see FIG. 34) described later.

[Control change table when pressing forward]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the forward pressing control change table will be described. The forward pressing control change table defines the correspondence between the change target position (scheduled stop position of the left reel 3L), the change status, the change status, and the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing.

For example, if the change status acquired based on the first stop table (refer to FIG. 33) at the time of the forward press is “1” and the planned stop position of the left reel 3L is “15”, the change status is “ The stop table number for the second and third stops is “12” at the time of forward pressing.
In the forward push control change table, if the change status and the second and third stop stop table numbers for forward push are not registered in the target position, the stop table number is not changed.

[Stop table for 2nd and 3rd stop when pushing forward and stop table when pushing irregularly]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36, the second and third stop tables for forward pressing and the stop table for irregular pressing will be described. The stop table for the second and third stops and the stop table for irregularity when pushing forward define 1-byte stop data according to each of the symbol positions “0” to “20”.

  Note that the second- and third-stop stop tables for forward press shown in FIG. 35 are referred to when the stop-table number for the second and third stops for forward press is “08”. 36 is referred to when the irregular pressing table selection data is “07”.

  In the stop data specified by the stop tables of the second and third stop tables at the time of forward pressing and the stop table at the time of irregularity, is the symbol position associated with the stop data appropriate as the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped? Has information on whether or not. The stop data includes information indicating whether or not the corresponding symbol position is appropriate as a position to stop the rotation of the reel, the bit corresponding to the “A line” column and the “B line” column in each stop table. Assign to the bit corresponding to. The stop data is defined by assigning information about which of these two types of information should be adopted to the bit corresponding to the “line change” column in each stop table.

  In other words, the second and third stop tables for stoppages and the stop table for anomalies at the time of forward pressing define a plurality of methods for determining the position at which the rotation of the reel is stopped. Therefore, even if the stop start position is the same symbol position, the position where the reel rotation is stopped can be varied based on the stop position at the time of the first stop. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to compress information.

  The determination of the number of sliding piece determination data is performed as follows. First, it is specified which of the eight bit strings (the data in the leftmost column in the figure corresponds to bit 1) constituting the stop data is referred to according to the type of the stop button in which the stop operation is detected. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, a column of “middle reel A line data” of bit 4 is designated.

  Then, referring to the designated bit string, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not “1” is defined as the corresponding data for each symbol position from the stop start position to the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols. As a result of this search, the difference from the stop start position to the symbol position where “1” is defined as the corresponding data is calculated, and this difference is used as the number of sliding piece determination data.

  Whether or not the bit string to be referred to is changed from the “A line” column to the “B line” column refers to the “line change” column and “1” is defined in the data corresponding to the stop start position. It is determined by whether or not. When it is determined that the line is to be changed, the column “B line” is designated thereafter, and the above search is performed.

[Pull-in priority table selection table]
Next, the pull-in priority table selection table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table selection table defines the correspondence between the pull-in priority table selection table number and stop button pressing order, and the pull-in priority table number in each combination.
The pull-in priority table number is data for acquiring information related to the priority order of display combinations defined in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 38).

  When the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time, the data in the “left reel first stop” column in the pull-in priority table selection table is referred to. For example, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time and the drawing priority table selection table number is “1”, the drawing priority table number “00” is acquired. When the middle reel 3C is pressed in the second stop, the pull-in priority table number is changed from “00” to “05”. On the other hand, when the left reel 3L is stopped for the first time and the pull-in priority table selection table number is “1”, when the right reel 3R is pressed in the second stop, the pull-in priority table number is changed from “00” to “ Change to "06".

  Further, in the pull-in priority table selection table, when the pull-in priority table number is not registered at the target position, the number shown in the right column of the right reel first stop column is the pull-in priority table number. Get as. For example, when the left reel 3L is first stopped and the pull-in priority table selection table number is “0”, when the right reel 3R is pressed in the second stop, the pull-in priority table number is registered at the target position. Not. Therefore, in this case, the right column of the first reel first stop column corresponding to the drawing priority table selection table number “0” is referred to, and “03” is acquired as the drawing priority table number.

[Pull-in priority table]
Next, the drawing priority table will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority table defines the correspondence between the pull-in data for each storage area type and the predetermined priority in each of the pull-in priority table numbers “00” to “06”.

  The pull-in priority order table is used for searching whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces obtained based on the stop table. The priority order is data that defines the order of priority stop display (drawn) between the types of symbol combinations related to winning. Each pull-in data is similar to “Internal winning combination” in the internal winning combination determination table shown in FIGS. 23 to 28 and “Display combination” in the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. It is represented by byte data, and a unique symbol combination is assigned to each bit in the one-byte data.

  In the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the above-described first stop table for first stop (see FIG. 33). However, when there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces, the number is changed to the appropriate number of sliding pieces. In other words, in the present embodiment, a more appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined based on the priority of the combination of symbols that allow the stop display by the internal winning combination regardless of the number of sliding symbols acquired from the stop table.

  In the present embodiment, the stop display (withdrawal) of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the higher priority is prioritized over the stop display of the symbol combination corresponding to the internal winning combination having the lower priority. To be done.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 38, not only the priority order of the internal winning combination differs depending on the pull-in priority table number, but also the number of priority divisions. Specifically, when the pull-in priority table numbers are “00”, “01”, and “04”, the priority number is set to 4, and the pull-in priority table numbers are “02” and “05”. In this case, the number of priority divisions is set to 3. When the pull-in priority table numbers are “03” and “06”, the number of priority sections is set to 1.

Here, in order to simplify the description, the priority when the pull-in priority table number is “00” will be described, and description of priorities in other pull-in priority table numbers will be omitted.
The priority “1” when the pull-in priority table number is “00” includes “C_determined cherries 3-4, 7-10”, “C_T bells 1-8”, “C_CU bells 1-12”, Pull-in data corresponding to “C_C bell” and “C_Billy lip 1-18” is defined.

  The priority order “2” when the pull-in priority order table number is “00” includes “C_CD ice 1-8”, “C_CU ice 1-2”, “C_C ice 1-4”, “C_determined cherry 1”. ˜12 ”,“ C_T bell 1-8 ”,“ C_CU bell 1-12 ”,“ C_C bell ”,“ C_billy lip 1-18 ”,“ C_CU lip 1-8 ”,“ C_T lip 1-6 ”, and , “C_C Lip 1 to 12” are defined.

  The priority “3” when the pull-in priority table number is “00” includes “C_special roles 1-2”, “C_CD ice 1-8”, “C_CU ice 1-2”, “C_B ice 1”. ˜2 ”,“ C_C ice 1-4 ”,“ C_determined cherry 1-12 ”,“ C_strong cherry 1-12 ”,“ C_weak cherry 1-4 ”,“ C_T bell 1-8 ”,“ C_CU bell ” 1-12 ”,“ C_C Bell ”,“ C_Billie Lip 1-18 ”,“ C_CU Lip 1-8 ”,“ C_T Lip 1-8 ”, and“ C_C Lip 1-12 ”are defined. Is done.

  The priority “4” when the pull-in priority table number is “00” includes “C_Billy Lip 1-18”, “C_T Lip 1-8”, “C_C Lip 1-12”, “C_Billy”, Retrieval data corresponding to “C_BAR”, “C_Red 7”, and “C_Don BB” is defined.

  For example, when the pull-in priority table number is “00”, the priority “1” defines “C_determined cherries 3-4, 7-10”, and the priority “2” includes “C_determined” Cherry 1-12 "is defined. That is, some internal winning combinations are defined in both the priority “1” and the priority “2”. As described above, the internal winning combination defined in both the priority “1” and the priority “2” has a higher priority than the internal winning combination defined only in the priority “1”. Thereby, the number of priorities can be reduced.

[Search order table]
Next, the search order table will be described with reference to FIG. The search order table preferentially applies from the range of numerical values predetermined as the number of sliding frames (“0” to “4” when the maximum number of sliding frames is 4) (hereinafter referred to as “search order”). ").

  The search order table defines the sliding piece number determination data obtained based on the stop table and the search order. That is, in this embodiment, the order of numerical values to be preferentially applied is determined based on the sliding piece number determination data. In addition, the search order table is provided assuming that there are a plurality of sliding frames having the same priority, and the search order table is applied in a higher order.

  In this embodiment, as described in the priority attraction-in control process of FIG. 236 described later, each numerical value is sequentially searched from the search order “5” in the lower order of the search order table to correspond to the search order “1”. The number of sliding frames is preferentially applied from the numerical value to be used.

[Game lock lottery table]
Next, the game lock lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS.
The game lock lottery table defines the lottery value of the type of game lock (game lock type) to be won according to the winning number related to the internal lottery in the general gaming state or the RT1 to 3 gaming states. The game lock in the present embodiment is generated during the game. While the game lock is occurring, even if a closing operation or a stopping operation is performed, the detection is treated as invalid or delayed.

  In the game lock lottery process of the present embodiment, basically, a random number value for production (random number denominator = 65536) extracted from a predetermined numerical range “0 to 65535” is set according to each game lock type. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. And then. The lottery is performed by determining whether the result of the subtraction is negative (whether a so-called “digit” has occurred). That is, the player has won the game lock when the subtraction result is less than 0.

  FIG. 40 shows the game lock lottery table A. This game lock lottery table A defines the lottery value that “game lock 9” wins when the winning number is “33” (abbreviation “F_normal lip”). That is, in this embodiment, when the winning number is “33”, whether or not to execute “game lock 9” is determined, and “game lock 9” is won (executed) with a probability of 64/65536. )

  FIG. 41 shows the game lock lottery table B. This game lock lottery table B defines lottery values that “game lock 1” to “game lock 4” win when the winning number is “8” (abbreviation “F_don BB + F_special role 1”). For example, when the winning number is “8”, “game lock 1” wins with a probability of 739/65536.

  FIG. 42 shows a game lock lottery table C. This game lock lottery table C defines lottery values that “game lock 4” to “game lock 8” win according to the winning number. For example, when the winning number is “1” (abbreviation “F_Don BB”), “Game Lock 5” is won with a probability of 6144/65536.

  If the winning number is “0” (out of line), the random number denominator is changed to “4294967296 (the second power of 65536)” in a game lock lottery process (see FIG. 223) described later. Therefore, when the winning number is “0” (out of the game), “game lock 4” is won with a probability of 13742/4294967296.

Next, “game lock 1” to “game lock 9” according to the present embodiment will be described.
When “game lock 1” is executed, a game lock of 49000 ms occurs when the start lever 16 is operated (lever on).
When “game lock 2” is executed, a game lock of 51000 ms is generated in response to the first stop operation.
When “game lock 3” is executed, a game lock of 51000 ms is generated in response to the second stop operation.
When “game lock 4” is executed, a game lock of 51000 ms is generated in response to the third stop operation.

When “game lock 5” is executed, a game lock of 3000 ms occurs at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. During the game lock, the first reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.
In the first reel effect, first, all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are vibrated for 1000 ms, and the right reel 3R is rotated forward by 1000 ms at a lower rotational speed than usual. Thereafter, all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are vibrated for 1000 ms, and the process ends. When the first reel effect is finished, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate forward at a normal rotation speed.

  The “vibration” of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is an operation that makes the reels 3L, 3C, 3R appear to vibrate by repeating forward and reverse rotations of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R at high speed. is there.

When “game lock 6” is executed, a game lock of 5000 ms occurs at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. While the game lock is occurring, the second reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.
In the second reel effect, after executing the same reel effect as the first reel effect, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are rotated forward by 1000 ms at a rotation speed slower than usual. Thereafter, all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are vibrated for 1000 ms, and the process ends. When the second reel effect is finished, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate forward at a normal rotation speed.

When “game lock 7” is executed, a game lock of 7000 ms occurs at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. While the game lock is occurring, the third reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.
In the third reel effect, after executing the same reel effect as the second reel effect, all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated forward by 1000 ms at a rotation speed slower than usual. Thereafter, all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are vibrated for 1000 ms, and the process ends. When the third reel effect is finished, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate forward at a normal rotation speed.

When “game lock 8” is executed, a game lock of 10000 ms occurs at the start of rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. Then, while the “game lock 8” is generated, the fourth reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.
The fourth reel effect is completed by performing the same reel effect as the third reel effect and then rotating all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reversely at a normal rotation speed for 3000 ms. When the fourth reel effect is finished, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R rotate forward at a normal rotation speed.

When “game lock 9” is executed, a game lock of 6000 ms occurs when the start lever 16 is operated (lever on). While the game lock is occurring, the fifth reel effect using the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed.
In the fifth reel effect, all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are vibrated for 6000 ms.

[Output condition table]
Next, the output condition table will be described with reference to FIG.
The output condition table defines a correspondence relationship between output conditions such as when the BB (BB1, BB2) is operated and on / off of the big hit signal “1” to the big hit signal “3”. In the present embodiment, when the BB (BB1, BB2) is activated, the big hit signal “1” is turned on and transmitted to the hall computer or the calling device 100. Then, at the end of BB (BB1, BB2), the big hit signal “1” is turned off.

In the present embodiment, when the RB (BB3) is activated, the big hit signal “2” is turned on and transmitted to the hall computer or the calling device 100. Then, at the end of RB (BB3), the big hit signal “2” is turned off.
Further, when the big hit signal “3” is on, the big hit signal “3” is turned off. The big hit signal “3” is turned on when an output counter (see FIG. 44) described later becomes zero.

[Subtraction condition table]
Next, the subtraction condition table will be described with reference to FIG.
The subtraction condition table defines whether or not the stop order and the subtraction condition corresponding to the value of the output counter are satisfied. In this embodiment, referring to the subtraction condition table, when it is determined that the subtraction condition is satisfied, the value of the output counter is decremented by “1”. Basically, when the gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state, “3” is set in the output counter.

  For example, when the value of the output counter is “3” and the stop order is “middle right”, the subtraction condition is satisfied. As a result, “1” is subtracted from the value of the output counter. On the other hand, when the value of the output counter is “3”, if the stop order is other than “middle right”, the subtraction condition is not satisfied, so the value of the output counter is not changed from “3”.

[Pattern winning action flag data table]
Next, the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table will be described with reference to FIG.
The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table defines the correspondence between the reel type and the internal winning combination data that can be displayed according to the symbol of each reel displayed on the winning determination line. That is, by referring to the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table, the internal winning combination that can be displayed at that time can be determined. The symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is provided corresponding to the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 11).

  For example, when the symbol “don” is stopped and displayed on the winning determination line of the left reel 3L, it can be displayed in the storage areas 1 to 29 corresponding to the symbol code “00000001” (don) in the reel type “left”. “1” is stored in the bit corresponding to the internal winning combination. Data defined in the symbol corresponding winning action flag data table is logically AND stored with data stored in a symbol code storage area (see FIG. 50) described later.

<Configuration of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configuration of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 53 will be described with reference to FIGS. 46 to 51. Although not described here (not shown), the main RAM 53 is also provided with storage areas for various control data, various flags, various counters and the like used for the various reel effects described above.

[Display combination storage area]
First, the configuration of the display combination storing area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the display combination storage area includes display combination storage areas 1 to 29 each represented by 1-byte data.

  In each of the display combination storage areas 1 to 29, when “1” stands for a predetermined bit (when stored), a combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined bit is displayed on the active line. Indicates. On the other hand, when all the bits are “0”, it indicates that the symbol combination related to winning is not displayed on the active line.

  The main RAM 53 is provided with an internal winning combination storing area (not shown). The internal winning combination storing area is configured similarly to the display winning combination storing area shown in FIG. In the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 29, when “1” stands for a plurality of bits, display of a combination of symbols corresponding to each bit is permitted. When all the bits are “0”, the content of the internal winning combination is “lost”.

  The main RAM 53 is provided with a carryover combination storage area (not shown). When “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7”, “C_BAR” and “C_Billy” are determined as the internal winning combination as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area as the carryover combination. Is done. The carryover combination stored in the carryover combination storage area is cleared until the corresponding symbol combination (for example, “Don”-“Don”-“Don” of “C_Don BB”) is displayed on the winning determination line. It is held without. While the carryover combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area, the carryover combination is stored in the internal winning combination storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game state flag storage area]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described.
The gaming state flag storage area is composed of gaming state flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game state flag, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2.

  In each of the game state flag storage areas 1 and 2, when “1” is stored (standing) in a predetermined bit, the bonus game or RT corresponding to the predetermined bit is being operated. Indicates. For example, when “1” is stored in bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, the operation of BB1 (“C_Don BB” or “C_Red 7”) is performed, and the game state is the BB1 gaming state. .

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The operation stop button storage area stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

  For example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has been pressed this time, that is, an operation stop button, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Also, for example, if the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, “1” is stored in bit 4. Based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area, the main CPU 51 identifies a stop button that has been pressed this time and a stop button that has not yet been pressed.

[Push order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The pressing order storage area stores a pressing order flag consisting of 1 byte. In the pressing order flag, the type of stop button pressing order is assigned to each bit. For example, when the pressing order of the stop button is “left middle right”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol code storage area stores, for each active line, the symbol code (symbol code storage region 1) of the symbol of the reel that was most recently stopped and the displayable symbols (symbol code storage regions 2 to 29). The After all the reels are stopped, the symbol codes corresponding to the display combination are stored in the symbol code storage areas 2 to 29.

  In this embodiment, when the stop control position is determined, the winning operation flag data corresponding to the symbol (code) of the stop control position is read from the symbol corresponding winning operation flag data table (see FIG. 45), and the winning operation flag is read out. The data is ANDed with the data already stored in the symbol code storage area. Then, the ANDed data is stored in the symbol code storage area shown in FIG. When a plurality of effective lines are provided, the same number of symbol code storage areas as the number of effective lines are provided.

[Retrieve priority data storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pull-in priority data storage area will be described with reference to FIG. The pull-in priority data storage area includes a left reel pull-in priority data storage area, a middle reel pull-in priority data storage area, and a right reel pull-in priority data storage area. That is, in the pull-in priority data storage area, a priority data storage area is provided for each reel type.

  Each drawing priority data storage area stores drawing priority data determined in accordance with each symbol position “0” to “20” of the corresponding reel. In the present embodiment, by referring to the pull-in priority data storage area, it is searched whether there is a more appropriate number of sliding symbols in addition to the number of sliding symbols determined based on the stop table described above.

  The contents of the priority order pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differ depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table (see FIG. 38) referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. . The pull-in priority data indicates that the higher the value, the higher the priority.

  By referring to the drawing priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. That is, the symbol for which the largest value is determined as the pull-in priority data becomes the symbol with the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the rank between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the search order defined by the above-described search order table (see FIG. 39).

  Although detailed description is omitted in this specification, the sub ROM 82 also stores various table data (for example, a navigation table) necessary for various rendering operations, and the sub RAM 83 also includes various storage areas. Is provided as appropriate.

[Game lock flag storage area]
Next, the structure of the game lock flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG.
The game lock flag storage area includes game lock flag storage areas 1 and 2 each represented by 1-byte data. In the present embodiment, in the game lock flag, a unique lock number is assigned to each bit of the game lock flag storage areas 1 and 2.

  In the present embodiment, when a game lock type is determined with reference to a lock lottery table (see FIGS. 40 to 42), a lock number corresponding to the game lock type is stored in the game lock flag storage area. For example, when the determined game lock type is game lock “1”, “1” is stored in bit 0 of the game lock flag storage area 1.

<Game state transition flow>
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, a transition flow of the gaming state between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state” and “BB gaming state” controlled by the main CPU 51 will be described.

  As described above, in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment, four types of gaming states of “RT0 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state” are provided as RT gaming states. Then, the main control circuit 41 (main CPU 51) refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 13) and controls the transition between “RT0 gaming state” to “RT3 gaming state” and “BB gaming state”.

First, at the time of shipment or at the end of “BB”, the gaming state becomes “RT0 gaming state”. Next, in the “RT0 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “Bell spill” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from the “RT0 gaming state” to the “RT1 gaming state”.
The “bell bell spill” in the present embodiment is “R_Bell transition 2-1” to “R_Bell transition 2-6” and “R_Bell transition 3-1” to “R_Bell transition” shown in FIG. It is a display combination of “Eye 3-21”.

In the “RT1 gaming state”, a combination of symbols related to “RT2 Lip” (any one of “C_RT2 Lip 1” to “C_RT2 Lip 12” in FIGS. 7 and 8) is displayed on the winning determination line. The gaming state shifts from the “RT1 gaming state” to the “RT2 gaming state”.
In the “RT0 gaming state”, when a combination of symbols related to “failed bell” (any one of “C_control bell 1” to “C_control bell 4”) is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state However, the “RT1 gaming state” shifts to the “RT0 gaming state”.

In the “RT2 gaming state (ART state)”, when the symbol combination related to “failed bell” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from “RT2 gaming state” to “RT0 gaming state”. .
Further, in the “RT2 gaming state”, when the symbol combination related to “Bell spill” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from “RT2 gaming state” to “RT1 gaming state”.

  In the case of “RT0 gaming state” to “RT2 gaming state”, when the internal winning combination relating to the operation of “BB” (any one of “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7”, “C_BAR”) is being carried over , Transition from the current gaming state to the “RT3 gaming state”. When the symbol combination relating to the operation of “BB” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state becomes “BB gaming state”. Thereafter, when the operation of “BB” ends, the gaming state transitions from “BB gaming state” to “RT0 gaming state”.

  In the case where “C_Billy” is being carried over among the internal winning combinations related to the operation of “BB”, the current gaming state is shifted to the “RT0 gaming state”. When the symbol combination related to “C_Billy” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state becomes “BB gaming state”. Thereafter, when the operation of “C_Billy” ends, the gaming state transitions from “BB gaming state” to “RT0 gaming state”.

In the present embodiment, in the RT0 gaming state, when ART execution is determined, a stop order for displaying a combination of symbols related to “Bell” such as “C_C Bell” on the winning determination line (display assistance) By not informing the information), it waits for a combination of symbols related to “bell spill” to be displayed on the winning determination line. When the symbol combination related to “Bell Spill” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from “RT0 gaming state” to “RT1 gaming state”.
In the gaming machine of the present invention, in the RT0 gaming state, when the execution of ART is determined, the stop order for displaying the combination of symbols related to “bell spill” on the winning determination line (display assistance) Information) may be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  In the present embodiment, in the RT1 gaming state, when the execution of ART is determined, a stop order (display auxiliary information) for displaying the symbol combination related to “RT2 lip” on the winning determination line is displayed. Displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. When the symbol combination related to “RT2 Lip” is displayed on the winning determination line, the gaming state shifts from “RT1 gaming state” to “RT2 gaming state”.

  “RT0 gaming state” and “RT1 gaming state” indicate a low RT gaming state according to the present invention. “RT2 gaming state” indicates a high RT gaming state according to the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, the “RT1 gaming state” directly shifts to the “RT2 gaming state”. On the other hand, there is no direct transition from the “RT0 gaming state” to the “RT2 gaming state”. In order to shift from “RT0 gaming state” to “RT2 gaming state”, first, “RT0 gaming state” shifts to “RT1 gaming state”, and then “RT1 gaming state” shifts to “RT2 gaming state”. . That is, the transition from the low RT gaming state to the high RT gaming state according to the present invention may transition directly or indirectly (taking a predetermined stage).

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination and stop order]
Next, the correspondence between the internal winning combination and the stop order will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 54 is a correspondence table between internal winning combinations and stop orders, and shows the types of display combinations according to the stop order.

  “RT0 transition lip” described in FIG. 54 indicates a display combination (“C_RT0 lip 1 to 10”) in which transition to the RT0 gaming state (general gaming state) is determined. “RT2 transition lip” indicates a display combination (“C_RT2 lip 1 to 12”) in which transition to the RT2 gaming state (ART state) is determined. “Normal lip” indicates a display combination related to re-playing regardless of the transition of the RT0 gaming state and the RT2 gaming state.

  Further, “C_CU bell” indicates a display combination (“C_CU bell 1 to 12”) in which the symbol “bell” is stopped and displayed along the cross-up line. “C_C bell” indicates a display combination (“C_C bell”) in which the symbol “bell” is stopped and displayed along the center line.

  In addition, “C_control bells 1 to 4” indicate display combinations (“C_control bells 1 to 4”) in which the payout number is “1”. “C_B bell” indicates a display combination (“C_B bell 1 to 24”) in which the symbol “bell” is stopped and displayed along the bottom line. “R_Bell Transition 2” and “R_Bell Transition 2” are displayed when “C_B Bell” cannot be stopped (missed) (“R_Bell Transition 2-1”). -6 "and" R_Bell transition 3-1 to 21 ").

  In the present embodiment, the push order is different for the stop display of various symbol combinations related to “RT0 transition lip” and “RT2 transition lip” and the success or failure of stop display of various symbol combinations related to “Bell”. Is set.

For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “2”, “C_C Lip 1-12”, “C_T Lip 1-8”, “C_CU Lip 1-8” and “C_RT0 Lip” are used as internal winning combinations. "1-10" will win. In this case, “normal lip” (“C_C lip 1 to 10”, “C_T” is provided on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “left middle right” or “right and left middle”. The combination of symbols according to any one of “Rip 1 to 8” and “C_CU Lip 1 to 8”) is stopped and displayed.
On the other hand, when the stop order is “middle left / right”, “middle right / left”, “right / left middle” and “right middle / left”, it relates to “RT0 transition lip” (any one of “C_RT0 lip 1 to 10”). The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed.

When the small combination / replay data pointer is “5”, “C_C Lip 1-12”, “C_T Lip 1-8”, “C_CU Lip 1-8” and “C_RT2 Lip” are used as internal winning combinations. 1-12 "wins. In this case, on the condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “middle left and right”, the symbol related to “RT2 transition lip” (any one of “C_RT2 lip 1 to 12”) The combination is stopped.
On the other hand, when the stop order is “left middle right”, “right / left middle”, “middle right / left”, “right left middle” and “right middle left”, “normal lip” (“C_C lip 1 to 10”, The combination of symbols according to “C_T Lip 1-8” or “C_CU Lip 1-8”) is stopped and displayed.

That is, a game advantageous to the player by the player executing the stop order surrounded by the thick solid line in FIG. 54 set in each of the small role / replay data pointers “2” to “8”. It becomes possible to shift to the state. The “advantageous gaming state” here means the RT2 gaming state (ART) in the end.
In this embodiment, as shown in the RT transition table of FIG. 13, in order to shift from the RT0 gaming state to the RT2 gaming state, it is necessary to go through the RT1 gaming state. This RT1 gaming state is not included in the “advantageous gaming state” because it has a low RT (the probability of winning an internal winning combination related to re-gaming) is low, similar to the RT0 gaming state.

When the small combination / replay data pointer is “21”, “C_C bell”, “C_B bell 5, 14, 21”, “C_control bell 1 to 12”, “R_bell” are used as internal winning combinations. "Transition 2-1 to 6" and "R_Bell Transition 3-1 to 21" are won. In this case, the combination of symbols related to “C_C bell” on condition that the stop order by pressing the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R is “middle left and right” or “middle right and left” (first stop order). Is stopped. As a result, a predetermined number of 12 medals are paid out.
The “C_C bell” indicates a specific example of the first predetermined combination according to the present invention.

On the other hand, when the stop order is “middle left / right” or “middle left / right” (second stop order), “C_B bell” if the stop button pressing timing for the rotating reel is a predetermined timing (correct answer). The combination of symbols relating to ("C_B bell 5, 14, 21") is stopped and displayed.
“C_B bell” (“C_B bell 5, 14, 21”) indicates a specific example of the second predetermined combination according to the present invention.

  On the other hand, if the timing of pressing the stop button for the rotating reel is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), “R_Bell Transition 2” or “R_Bell Transition 3” (“R_Bell Transition 2-1-6”). ”And“ any of R_Bell transition points 3-1 to 21 ”) are stopped and displayed.

  Therefore, when the stop order is “left middle right” or “left and right middle” (second stop order), if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing (correct answer), a predetermined number of 12 sheets Medals are paid out. If the stop button is pressed at a timing other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the medal is not paid out.

Then, on the condition that the stop order is “middle right and left” or “middle right and left” (third stop order), the combination of symbols related to “C_control bells 1 to 4” is stopped and displayed. Thereby, one medal which is a specific number smaller than the predetermined number is paid out.
The “C_control bell” indicates a specific example of the specific role according to the present invention.

  In the present embodiment, a first stop order in which a predetermined number (12) of medals are paid out, a second stop order in which a predetermined number of medals are not paid out according to the timing of pressing the stop button, and a specific number ( And a third stop order in which only one medal is paid out. In this case, the recommended stop order (push order) may be the second stop order.

  Accordingly, even if the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop order or the third stop order that is not recommended, the probability that the small combination in which a predetermined number (12) of medals are paid out is stopped and displayed is improved. Only a specific number (one) of medals may be paid out. That is, when stopping a plurality of reels in a stop order that is not recommended, only a specific number (one) of medals is paid out with a probability of 1/2.

  As a result, it is possible to allow the player to recognize that the game should be performed in the second stop order in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out in accordance with the press timing of the stop button. As a result, the game is played in the recommended second stop order, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the payout of medals in the normal game, and improve the probability that the medals are paid out in the assist time (AT). be able to.

[Correspondence table of internal winning combination, stop order and RT transition]
Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop order, and RT transition will be described.
FIG. 55 is a correspondence table of the internal winning combination, stop order, and RT transition, and shows the transition destination of the RT gaming state according to the stop order.

  For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “2”, the combination of symbols related to “normal lip” is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “left middle right” or “left and right middle”. Is done. As a result, the symbol combination related to “RT0 transition lip” is not stopped and displayed, and the transition to the RT0 gaming state is avoided. Further, when the small role / replay data pointer is “5”, the combination of symbols related to “RT2 transition lip” is stopped and displayed on condition that the stop order is “middle left and right”. As a result, the RT gaming state shifts to the RT2 gaming state.

  If the small role / replay data pointer is “21”, the stop order is “middle left / right” and the stop order is “middle left / right” or “middle right / left” (first stop order). In addition, the combination of symbols related to “C_C bell” is stopped and displayed, and there is no transition of the RT gaming state.

  When the stop order is “middle left right” or “middle left and right” (second stop order), the combination of symbols relating to “C_B bell” if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing (correct answer) Is stopped and there is no transition of the RT gaming state. If the timing of pressing the stop button is other than the predetermined timing (incorrect answer), the symbol combination related to “R_Bell Transition 2” or “R_Bell Transition 2” is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state is RT1. Transition to gaming state.

  When the stop order is “middle right / left” or “middle right / left” (third stop order), the combination of symbols related to “C_control bells 1 to 4” is stopped and the RT gaming state is RT0. Transition to gaming state.

  As described above, ignoring the recommended second stop order, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first or third stop order (the player does not know the first stop order) and at least 1 It is conceivable to secure payout of medals. However, as described above, when a plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop order, not only the payout of medals becomes one but also shifts to an unfavorable gaming state (RT0 gaming state).

  Therefore, even if a plurality of reels are stopped in the first or third stop order that is not recommended, the situation is disadvantageous for the player. As a result, in the normal game other than the assist time (AT), the plurality of reels can be stopped in the second stop order recommended by the player.

<Description of sub game state>
Next, the sub gaming state will be described with reference to FIG.
In the present embodiment, various game states related to effects controlled by the sub control circuit 42 (sub CPU 81) are referred to as “sub game states”. In the present embodiment, the general state, chance zone (CZ), D_ART, B_ART, G_ART (G zone), R_ART (rocket zone), and viking rush (VR) are set as the sub gaming state.

  The general state and the chance zone are sub game states in which the ART is not activated. On the other hand, D_ART, B_ART, G_ART, R_ART and Viking Rush are sub gaming states in which ART operates.

  In the present embodiment, three types of ART are provided. The first ART (first assist state) is D_ART, the second ART (second assist state) is B_ART, and the third ART (third assist state) is G_ART (G zone). is there. R_ART is the same type of ART as G_ART, and the difference from G_ART is the end condition. Viking rush is executed during D_ART, B_ART, G_ART or R_ART.

[General status]
The general state is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state. During this general state, basically, a lottery (ART lottery) for determining whether or not the ART is won is performed with reference to an ART lottery table (see FIG. 71, FIG. 74, etc.) described later for each game.

  When ART is won in the ART lottery in the general state, at least D_ART or B_ART is won. When the ART is won by the ART lottery, a lottery is performed for determining the number of precursor games (hereinafter referred to as “art precursor game number”) until the winning ART is shifted to. That is, when the ART is won during the general state, the sub gaming state shifts to D_ART or B_ART after the number of ART precursor games has been consumed.

  Further, during the general state, with reference to a chance zone transfer lottery table (not shown) for each game, whether or not to shift to the chance zone (CZ) is determined. When the transition to the chance zone is determined, the number of precursor games until the transition to the chance zone (hereinafter referred to as “the number of CZ precursor games”), the number of stay games in the chance zone (hereinafter referred to as the “number of CZ games”). A lottery for determining etc. is performed.

  In addition, the pachislot of the present invention includes a lottery for determining whether or not to move to the chance zone (CZ), and a chance zone shift in which the number of predictive games and the number of stay games in the chance zone before the shift to the chance zone are determined. A lottery table may be used. That is, whether or not to shift to the chance zone, the number of CZ precursor games and the number of CZ games when shifting to the chance zone, may be determined by one lottery.

[Chance zone]
The chance zone is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT0 gaming state and the RT1 gaming state. When the transition to the chance zone is determined in the general state, and the number of CZ precursor games is exhausted, the sub gaming state is shifted from the general state to the chance zone. Then, after the transition to the chance zone, when the number of CZ games has been consumed, the chance zone ends.

  It should be noted that the pachislot of the present invention has predetermined conditions such as when a predetermined internal winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination without determining the number of CZ games, or when a predetermined display combination is stopped and displayed. As an opportunity, the end of the chance zone may be determined.

  During the chance zone, ART lottery is basically performed with reference to an ART lottery table (see FIG. 72, FIG. 75, etc.) described later for each game. The ART lottery in the chance zone has a higher probability of winning the ART than the ART lottery in the general state. When ART is won in the ART lottery in the chance zone, at least D_ART or B_ART is won as in the general state. That is, when the ART is won during the chance zone, the sub gaming state shifts to D_ART or B_ART after the number of ART precursor games is exhausted.

[D_ART]
D_ART is a sub gaming state that is executed during the RT2 gaming state. For example, D_ART is started after D_ART is won by ART lottery during the general state or chance zone, and the number of ART precursor games determined by lottery is digested. Also, D_ART is started when information indicating that D_ART has been won (D_ART winning information) is stored in a sub-storage area described later when D_ART or B_ART is completed.

  When the sub gaming state shifts to D_ART, the number of staying games of D_ART (hereinafter, “ART start G (game) number”) is determined by referring to the ART game number random determination table (not shown). The determined “ART start G number” is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game in D_ART. D_ART ends when the value of the ART game number counter reaches “0”.

  In D_ART, referring to a continuous stock lottery table (not shown) for each game, whether or not the continuous stock is won is lottered (continuous stock lottery), and every time the continuous stock wins, 1 is added to the continuous stock counter. To do.

  When the continuation stock is won during D_ART, after the game of “ART start G number” is digested in D_ART, a new “ART start G number” is set and D_ART is continued (looped). That is, if the value of the continuous stock counter is equal to or greater than “1” when the “ART start G number” game is digested, the value of the continuous stock counter is decremented by “1” to determine the number of continuous ART games. “ART start G number” is determined with reference to a lottery table (not shown). Then, the determined “ART start G number” is set in the ART game number counter, and D_ART is continued.

  Therefore, D_ART is repeated until the value of the continuation stock counter becomes “0”. In this embodiment, as the continuation stock wins in D_ART, the value of the continuation stock counter is added to increase the number of continuations of D_ART, and D_ART that is advantageous to the player can be continued for a long time.

  Further, during D_ART, ART lottery is basically performed for each game with reference to an ART lottery table (see FIGS. 110 to 121 and the like) described later. When each ART is won by the ART lottery in D_ART, the information of the won ART is stored in a sub storage area described later.

[B_ART]
B_ART is a sub gaming state executed during the RT2 gaming state. For example, the B_ART is started after the B_ART is won by the ART lottery during the general state or the chance zone, and the number of ART precursor games determined by the lottery is digested. In addition, when D_ART or B_ART ends, it is started when the winning information of B_ART is stored in a sub storage area described later.

  When the sub gaming state shifts to B_ART, the “ART start G number” of B_ART is determined by referring to the ART game number determination table (not shown). The determined “ART start G number” is set in the ART game number counter. The value of the ART game number counter is decremented by “1” for each game in B_ART. B_ART ends when the value of the ART game number counter reaches “0”.

  In B_ART, with reference to a game number addition lottery table (not shown) for each game, the number of additional games is lottery (additional game number lottery), and the determined number of additional games is added to the ART game number counter. That is, as the number of additional games is determined in B_ART, the number of ART games increases, and B_ART that is advantageous to the player can be continued for a long time.

  Further, during B_ART, ART lottery is basically performed for each game with reference to an ART lottery table (see FIGS. 98 to 109, etc.) described later. When each ART wins by ART lottery in B_ART, the information of the winning ART is stored in a sub-storage area to be described later.

[G_ART]
G_ART is a sub gaming state executed during the RT2 gaming state. G_ART is started when the winning information of G_ART is stored in the sub-storage area during D_ART or B_ART. That is, when the winning information of G_ART is stored in the sub storage area, D_ART or B_ART is interrupted and G_ART is started.
Note that the G_ART according to the present embodiment is started after the game of the number of harbinger signs determined by lottery is digested.

  When G_ART is started, the number of combined games is determined with reference to a combined game number lottery table (not shown). The determined combined game number is set in the combined game number counter. Therefore, G_ART ends when the value of the combined game number counter becomes “0”.

  During G_ART, ART lottery is basically performed for each game with reference to an ART lottery table (see FIGS. 123 to 128, etc.) described later. The probability that each ART wins by ART lottery during G_ART is higher than the probability that each ART wins by ART lottery during D_ART or B_ART. Further, when each ART is won by the ART lottery in G_ART, the information of the winning ART is stored in a sub-storage area to be described later.

  During G_ART, the value of the ART game number counter set in D_ART or B_ART, which is the sub gaming state before the transition to G_ART, is not subtracted. When G_ART ends, the sub gaming state returns to D_ART or B_ART before the transition to G_ART.

[R_ART]
R_ART is a sub gaming state executed during the RT2 gaming state. R_ART is started by interrupting D_ART or B_ART when the winning information of R_ART is stored in the sub-storage area during D_ART or B_ART. In this case, after the game of the number of rocket precursors determined by lottery is digested, D_ART or B_ART is interrupted and R_ART is started.

  Also, R_ART is started after G_ART ends when the winning information of R_ART is stored in the sub-storage area during G_ART. In this embodiment, when the winning information of R_ART is stored in the sub-storage area during G_ART, the rocket warning game that is performed over one or a plurality of games is not performed after G_ART ends. That is, when G_ART ends, the sub gaming state shifts from G_ART to R_ART.

  In the gaming machine of the present invention, the winning information of R_ART is stored in the sub-storage area during G_ART, and when G_ART ends, the game of the number of rocket precursor games is digested and R_ART is started. May be. In this case, when G_ART ends, the sub gaming state returns to D_ART or B_ART before the transition to G_ART. Then, after D_ART or B_ART has consumed the number of rocket precursor games, R_ART is started.

  Also, R_ART ends when “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7” or “C_BAR” is determined as the internal winning combination. That is, R_ART ends when the internal winning combination relating to the bonus game (BB1 or BB2) is determined. The R_ART according to the present invention may be terminated when the combination of symbols related to “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7”, or “C_BAR” is stopped and displayed.

  In the present embodiment, even if “C_Billy” related to the operation of BB3 is determined as an internal winning combination, R_ART does not end. When “C_Billy” is determined as an internal winning combination during R_ART, it is notified that “C_Billy” has won internally, and the symbol combination “Billy BAR-Billy BAR-Billy BAR” corresponding to “C_Billy” "Prompt to stop display".

  Then, when “BILLY BAR-BILLY BAR-BILLY BAR” is stopped and displayed, BB3 is activated. In this case, R_ART is interrupted, and the sub gaming state shifts to the general state (or chance zone). After that, when the operation of BB3 is finished, the sub gaming state returns to R_ART before the transition to the general state (or chance zone).

  During R_ART, ART lottery is basically performed for each game with reference to an ART lottery table (see FIGS. 129 and 130) described later. The probability that each ART wins by the ART lottery during R_ART is higher than the probability that each ART wins by the ART lottery during D_ART or B_ART. Further, when each ART is won by the ART lottery in R_ART, the information of the winning ART is stored in a sub storage area described later.

[Viking Rush]
The viking rush shows a specific example of an alternative production according to the present invention. This viking rush is a sub gaming state related to an effect in which the addition (addition) of the number of ART games is expected, and is executed during D_ART, B_ART, G_ART, or R_ART. Whether or not to execute this Viking Rush is determined for each game during D_ART, B_ART, G_ART, and R_ART.
The viking rush is started when a correct answer is given to an alternative question (an alternative production introduction effect to be described later) after winning whether or not to execute.

  The Viking Rush performs an alternative production over at least five games. Specifically, the player selects one of the character decoration portions 22L and 22R (see FIG. 2) of the pachi-slot 1 and performs an effect of touching (touching) with the hand. As described above, the character decoration portions 22L and 22R are provided with the touch sensors 23L and 23R. Therefore, when the player's hand touches the character decorations 22L and 22R, the touch sensor (23L or 23R) that touched the terminal transmits an input signal to the sub-control circuit 42.

  In the viking rush, one of the character decoration portions 22L and 22R is set to the correct answer and the other is set to the incorrect answer for each game. And it is discriminate | determined whether the character decoration part which the player selected is correct. In the present embodiment, the number of ART games to be added (hereinafter referred to as “VR added game number”) is determined according to the number of correct answers in the alternative presentation (Viking Rush) executed over five games. To do. This “VR added game number” indicates a specific example of the number of added games according to the present invention.

In this embodiment, when the number of correct answers is “n”, the initial value is “d”, and the coefficient is “f”, the VR added game number “m” is calculated by the following calculation formula.
m = d × f ⁿ⁻¹

Therefore, the VR additional game number determined in the Viking Rush is multiplied by f every time the answer is correct.
In this embodiment, the initial value “d” is set to “20”, and the coefficient “f” is set to “2”. Thereby, the VR added game number “m” is calculated by the following calculation formula.
m = 20 × 2 ⁿ⁻¹

  That is, the VR additional game number “m” when the number of correct answers is one in five alternative effects is “20”, and the VR additional game number “m” when the number of correct answers is two is , “40”. Further, the VR additional game number “m” when the number of correct answers is three is “80”, and the VR additional game number “m” when the number of correct answers is four is “160”. The VR added game number “m” when the number of correct answers is 5 (all correct answers for 5 alternative effects) is “320”.

  If there are one or more incorrect answers in the five alternative productions, the Viking Rush ends with the fifth alternative production. On the other hand, if all of the five alternative choices are correct, then the alternative choice is extended until the answer is incorrect. In the present embodiment, the sixth and subsequent effects are referred to as “Viking Rush (VR) Extra”.

  In this embodiment, every time a correct answer is made in the Viking Rush Extra, “320” is added to the VR added game number determined by the fifth time. For example, if the first Viking Rush Extra (sixth since Viking Rush was started) was correct and the second (seventh Viking Rush was started) was incorrect, the number of VR extra games m ”becomes“ 640 ”. Further, if the answer to the Viking Rush Extra is correct up to the second time and the third time is incorrect, the VR added game number “m” becomes “960”.

In the Viking Rush during D_ART or B_ART, when an additional number of games (VR added game number) is determined, the determined additional game number is added to the ART game number counter in D_ART or B_ART.
On the other hand, when the number of games added (number of VR added games) is determined in the Viking Rush during G_ART or R_ART, the ART game number counter in D_ART or B_ART that is the sub gaming state before the transition to G_ART or R_ART In addition, the VR added game number is added.

  In this way, in VR (Viking Rush), since the “VR added game number” is determined based on the player's selection result, the “VR added game number” in “AT (ART)”, that is, VR (Viking Rush) is determined. ) Can attract the player's interest. As a result, it is possible to improve the fun of games related to “AT (ART)”.

<Configuration of data table stored in sub-ROM>
Next, the configuration of various data tables stored in the sub ROM 82 will be described.

[Special lottery table]
First, the special lottery table will be described with reference to FIG. The special lottery table defines the changed small role / replay data pointer to be changed according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.

  For example, when the bonus data pointer is “1”, the small role / replay data pointer is “16”, and the game lock flag is “0”, the changed small role / replay data “40” is determined as the pointer. The game lock flag is “0” when it is not any of “1” to “8”.

  Further, when the bonus data pointer is “1” and the game lock flag is any one of “1” to “4”, even if the small role / replay data pointer is any value, “42” is determined as the data pointer for the small role / replay.

[Lottery flag lottery table]
Next, a lottery flag lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS.
The lottery flag lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag according to the bonus data pointer, the small role / replay data pointer, and the game lock flag.

  In this embodiment, lottery flags A-1, A-2, A-3, lottery flags B-1, B-2, B-3, lottery flag D, lottery flag G, lottery flag H, lottery flag I. -1, I-2, lottery flag J and lottery flag K are determined. These lottery flags are used in an effect determination process (see FIG. 252) described later.

FIG. 58 shows a lottery flag A-1 lottery table. The lottery flag A-1 lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag A-1 according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “0” or “18”, “0” is set as the lottery flag A-1 regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag. It is determined.

FIG. 59 shows a lottery flag A-2 lottery table. The lottery flag A-2 lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag A-2 according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the bonus data pointer is “0” and the small role / replay data pointer is “42” or “43”, regardless of the value of the game lock flag, the lottery flag A-2 As a result, “0” is determined.

FIG. 60 shows a lottery flag A-3 lottery table. The lottery flag A-3 lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag A-3 according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “0” or “18”, “0” is set as the lottery flag A-3 regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag. It is determined.

FIG. 61 shows a lottery flag B-1 lottery table. The lottery flag B-1 lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag B-1 according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is "0", "1" is determined as the lottery flag B-1 regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag.

FIG. 62 shows a lottery flag B-2 lottery table. The lottery flag B-2 lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag B-2 according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “25”, “0” is determined as the lottery flag B-1 regardless of the values of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag.

FIG. 63 shows a lottery flag B-3 lottery table. The lottery flag B-3 lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag B-3 according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “0” or “18”, “0” is set as the lottery flag B-3 regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag. It is determined.

FIG. 64 shows a lottery flag D lottery table. The lottery flag D lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag D according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “9”, “1” is determined as the lottery flag D regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag.

FIG. 65 shows a lottery flag G lottery table. The lottery flag G lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag G according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, if the small role / replay data pointer is “0” or “18”, “0” is determined as the lottery flag G regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag. The

FIG. 66 shows a lottery flag H lottery table. The lottery flag H lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag H according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “0” or “18”, “0” is determined as the lottery flag H regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag. The

  Further, when the small role / replay data pointer is “1”, “2” is determined as the lottery flag H regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag. However, even when the small role / replay data pointer is “1”, a condition for generating a navigation for transmitting a jackpot signal “3”, which will be described later, to the hall computer / calling device via the external terminal board 18S. Is satisfied, the lottery flag H is changed from “2” to “3”.

FIG. 67 shows a lottery flag I-1 lottery table. The lottery flag I-1 lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag I-1 according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “0” or “18”, “0” is determined as the lottery flag H regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag. The

FIG. 68 shows a lottery flag I-2 lottery table. The lottery flag I-2 lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag I-2 according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “0” or “18”, “0” is set as the lottery flag I-2 regardless of the value of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag. It is determined.

FIG. 69 shows a lottery flag J lottery table. The lottery flag J lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag J according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “41”, “1” is determined as the lottery flag J regardless of the values of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag.

FIG. 70 shows a lottery flag K lottery table. The lottery flag K lottery table defines the value of the lottery flag K according to the data pointer and the game lock flag.
For example, when the small role / replay data pointer is “10” or “12”, “1” is determined as the lottery flag K regardless of the values of the bonus data pointer and the game lock flag. The

[ART lottery table]
Next, the ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS.
The ART lottery table is referred to when performing ART lottery during non-ART and during non-bonus. This ART lottery table shows a correspondence relationship between the lottery result values ("0" to "7") corresponding to the contents of winning the ART and the lottery values set in accordance with the lottery flag A-1.

In the ART lottery using the ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially by lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.
The ART lottery referring to various ART lottery tables is performed in an ART lottery process (see FIG. 249) described later.

  FIG. 71 shows an ART lottery table (part 1). This ART lottery table (part 1) is referred to when the sub gaming state is “general state”, “setting 1”, and “between non-flags”.

  Here, “between flags” and “between non-flags” will be described. In this embodiment, when “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7”, “C_BAR”, and “C_Billy” are determined as the internal winning combination, the internal winning combination is stored in the carryover combination storage area as the carryover combination. The Specifically, when “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7”, “C_BAR”, and “C_Billy” are determined, bits corresponding to bits 0 to 3 of the carryover combination storage area 1 are “1”. become.

  “Between flags” is a period in which the corresponding bits 0 to 3 of the carryover combination storage area 1 are “1”, and “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7”, “C_BAR” are used as internal winning combinations. And “C_Billy” is carried over. “Between non-flags” is a period in which bits 0 to 3 of the carryover combination storage area 1 are “0”, and “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7”, “C_BAR” and “ This is a period in which “C_Billy” is not carried over.

  However, in this embodiment, a game in which “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7”, “C_BAR”, and “C_Billy” are determined as the internal winning combination is “between flags” and “between non-flags”. Not included, “flag established”.

  In the ART lottery table (part 1) shown in FIG. 71, “0” is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type. The first lottery table type is used when determining a table number with reference to a later-described table number determination table for general medium stock (see FIG. 91).

  As shown in FIG. 71, when performing an ART lottery with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 1), there is a high probability that the value of the lottery result will be “0 (out)”. For example, even if the lottery flag A-1 is “7 (strong ice)” or “9 (strong cherry)”, the value of the lottery result is always “0 (out)”.

  FIG. 72 shows an ART lottery table (No. 2). In this ART lottery table (part 2), “1” is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type, the sub gaming state is “chance zone (CZ)”, “setting 1”, and “ Referenced in the case of “between non-flags”.

  When the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (part 2), the value of the lottery result is “1 (B_ART), compared with the case where the ART lottery is referred to with reference to the ART lottery table (part 1) shown in FIG. The probability that “winning)” or “2 (D_ART winning)” is determined increases. That is, during the chance zone, the probability of winning the ART is higher than in the general state.

  For example, when the lottery flag A-1 is “6 (weak ice)” or “7 (strong ice)”, “2 (B_ART winning)” is determined rather than “1 (B_ART winning)” as the lottery result value. D_ART winning) is highly likely to be determined. As shown in FIG. 72, when the lottery flag A-1 is “6 (weak ice)”, “2 (D_ART winning)” is determined as the lottery result value with a probability of about 1/3. If the lottery flag A-1 is “7 (strong ice)”, “2 (D_ART winning)” is determined as the lottery result value with a probability of about 2/3. On the other hand, when the lottery flag A-1 is “6 (weak ice)” or “7 (strong ice)”, “1 (B_ART winning)” is not determined as the lottery result value.

  On the other hand, when the lottery flag A-1 is “8 (weak cherry)” or “9 (strong cherry)”, the value of the lottery result is “1 (rather than“ 2 (D_ART winning) ”. “B_ART winning)” is likely to be determined. As shown in FIG. 72, when the lottery flag A-1 is “8 (weak cherry)”, “1 (B_ART winning)” is determined as the lottery result value with a probability of about ¼. When the lottery flag A-1 is “9 (strong cherry)”, “1 (B_ART winning)” is determined as the lottery result value with a probability of 1/2. On the other hand, when the lottery flag A-1 is “8 (weak cherry)” or “9 (strong cherry)”, “2 (D_ART winning)” is not determined as the lottery result value.

  The internal winning combination relating to weak ice (small role / replay data pointer “10”) and strong ice (small role / replay data pointer “11”) is a specific example of “first special role” according to the present invention. Is. Further, the internal winning combination relating to the weak cherry (small role / replay data pointer “12”) or strong cherry (small role / replay data pointer “13”, “14”) is the “second special role” according to the present invention. One specific example is shown. Furthermore, “D_ART” indicates a specific example of the “first assist state” according to the present invention, and “B_ART” indicates a specific example of the “second assist state” according to the present invention. is there.

  Therefore, when “first special combination” is determined as an internal winning combination during “non-ART”, the probability that the first assist state wins in the ART lottery of the game is higher than that in the second assist state. On the other hand, when the “second special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination during “non-ART”, the probability that the second assist state wins in the ART lottery of the game is higher than that in the first assist state.

  FIG. 73 shows an ART lottery table (No. 3). In this ART lottery table (No. 3), “2” is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type, “with base ART information”, “setting 1”, and “between non-flags”. Referenced in case.

Here, “base ART information” will be described. The “base ART information” is information stored in a sub storage area (see FIG. 218) described later when there is an ART to be started or restored next.
In the present embodiment, the winning ART is started after one or a plurality of precursor games after winning various ARTs. Accordingly, it is determined that “the base ART information is present” during one or a plurality of precursor games played in the general state and the chance zone. Specifically, if the winning information of “D_ART” or “B_ART” is stored in “ART stock area A” or “ART stock area B” of a sub storage area (see FIG. 218) described later, “base ART” “There is information”.

  As shown in FIG. 73, when performing an ART lottery with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 3), “7 (G_ART winning)” may be determined as a lottery result value. For example, when the lottery flag A-1 is “7 (strong ice)” or “9 (strong cherry)”, “7 (G_ART winning)” is determined as the lottery result value with a probability of about 1/3. The

  FIG. 74 shows an ART lottery table (No. 4). This ART lottery table (No. 4) is assigned “3” as the value of the first lottery table type, and is referred to when it is “general state”, “setting 1”, and “flag is established”. Is done. As shown in FIG. 74, when performing an ART lottery with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 4), there is a high probability that the value of the lottery result will be “0 (out)”.

  FIG. 75 shows an ART lottery table (No. 5). In this ART lottery table (No. 5), “4” is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type, “chance zone (CZ)”, “setting 1”, and “flag established”. Referenced in case. As shown in FIG. 75, when the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 5), the lottery result is compared to the case where the ART lottery is referred to with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 4) shown in FIG. The probability that “1 (B_ART winning)” or “2 (D_ART winning)” is determined as the value of becomes high.

  FIG. 76 shows an ART lottery table (No. 6). In this ART lottery table (No. 6), “5” is assigned as the value of the first lottery table type, “base ART information is present”, “setting 1”, and “flag established” To be referenced. As shown in FIG. 76, when performing ART lottery with reference to the ART lottery table (No. 3), “7 (G_ART winning)” may be determined as the lottery result value.

  In the present embodiment, ART lottery is not performed for “between flags”. As a result, in the “between flags”, the internal winning combination relating to the replay is more easily determined than the normal state (the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state) without intentionally stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus operation. Even if you continue the RT3 gaming state, you will not win the ART.

  However, ART lottery is performed in a game in which “C_Don BB”, “C_Red 7”, “C_BAR”, and “C_Billy” are determined as internal winning combinations, that is, a game in which “flag is established”. In “flag establishment”, a small winning combination with a low winning probability may be determined as an internal winning combination simultaneously with the internal winning combination related to the bonus. When a small combination having a low winning probability is determined as an internal winning combination, the probability of winning an ART increases.

  Therefore, in a “flag established” game where a small winning combination with a low winning probability may be determined as an internal winning combination, ART lottery is performed. In this embodiment, the ART lottery table that is referred to when “flag is established” is provided separately from the ART lottery table that is referred to when “between non-flags”.

  77 to 82 show the ART lottery table (No. 7) to the ART lottery table (No. 12). The ART lottery table (part 7) to the ART lottery table (part 12) are referred to in the case of “setting 6”.

83 to 88 show an ART lottery table (No. 13) to an ART lottery table (No. 18). The ART lottery table (No. 13) to the ART lottery table (No. 18) is referred to when there is a “penalty” (common to all settings).
In the present embodiment, for example, “10” is given as a “penalty addition point” when a non-recommended pressing order (stop order) is performed. If the total number of “penalty addition points” is equal to or greater than “1”, an ART lottery is performed using a penalty-use ART lottery table (not shown). The “penalty addition point” is subtracted by “1” for each game.

  As shown in FIG. 84, when the sub game state is “chance zone (CZ)”, “penalty” is present, and “between non-flags”, the value of the lottery result is “0 (out)”. There is a high probability of becoming. For example, even if the lottery flag A-1 is “7 (strong ice)” or “9 (strong cherry)”, the value of the lottery result is always “0 (out)”.

[General and CZ ART stock area sorting lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, the general and CZ ART stock area sorting lottery tables will be described.
The general and CZ ART stock area sorting lottery table is referenced when “D_ART” or “B_ART” is won in a non-ART and non-bonus ART lottery and the stock area for storing the information is determined. Is done.

  The general and CZ ART stock area sorting lottery table shows the correspondence between the lottery result value ("0" or "1") corresponding to the ART stock area and the lottery value set in accordance with the lottery flag A-1. Indicates.

  89 and 90, in the stock area allocation using the general and CZ ART stock area allocation lottery table shown in FIG. 89 and FIG. 90, first, a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, 0-32767, random number denominator = 32768). Are sequentially subtracted by the lottery value defined for each lottery result value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won. The above-described stock area allocation is performed in an ART lottery process (see FIG. 249) described later.

  FIG. 89 shows a general and CZ ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 1). This general and CZ ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 1) is referred to when “B_ART” is won. As shown in FIG. 89, when “B_ART” is won by ART and lottery in CZ, “0 (ART stock area A)” is always determined as the lottery result value.

  FIG. 90 shows a general and CZ ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 2). The general and CZ ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 2) is referred to when “D_ART” is won. As shown in FIG. 90, when “D_ART” is won by ART and lottery in CZ, “0 (ART stock area A)” is always determined as the value of the lottery result.

  In the sub storage area, an ART stock area A and an ART stock area B are provided. In the ART stock area A, winning information of “D_ART” or “B_ART” scheduled to display (notify) that “ART” has been won is stored. In the ART stock area B, winning information of “D_ART” or “B_ART” scheduled to hide (not notify) that the player has won the ART is stored.

  When “D_ART” or “B_ART” is won by the ART and lottery in CZ, the ART winning information is not stored in the ART stock area in the sub storage area. In the present embodiment, winning an ART in a state where no ART winning information is stored in the ART stock area in the sub storage area is referred to as “ART first hit”.

  In the present embodiment, in the case of “ART first hit”, any of “D_ART” and “B_ART” is stored, it is stored in the ART stock area A in the sub storage area. That is, in the case of “first hit of ART”, it is always displayed (notified) that “D_ART” or “B_ART” has been won.

  In the present embodiment, when “D_ART” is won in the “first hit of ART”, a symbol (for example, “Don-chan”) corresponding to “D_ART” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. On the other hand, when “B_ART” is won in the “first hit of ART”, a symbol (for example, “Billy”) corresponding to “B_ART” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. In addition, when “D_ART” and “B_ART” are overlapped in the “first hit of ART”, a symbol corresponding to “D_ART” and a symbol corresponding to “B_ART” are simultaneously displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11.

  The display of the symbol corresponding to “D_ART” or “B_ART” is performed, for example, in a game (game) that wins “D_ART” or “B_ART”. However, the symbols corresponding to “D_ART” and “B_ART” may be displayed at a timing due to the winning of “D_ART” or “B_ART”. In the present embodiment, the timing resulting from winning of “D_ART” or “B_ART” is within a predetermined number (several times) of games (games) from the game (game) winning of “D_ART” or “B_ART”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, since the symbol corresponding to the winning “ART” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11, the winning “ART” and the type can be recognized by the player. As a result, the player can be aware of the type of “ART” to be executed later, and when “ART” is executed (at the start), the type of “ART” is not known and the gameability is ambiguous. Never become.

  Further, the pachi-slot 1 of the present embodiment is configured such that “D_ART” and “B_ART” can be won in duplicate. Thereby, the relevance of the two types of “ART” is increased, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, when “D_ART” and “B_ART” are overlapped, a symbol corresponding to “D_ART” and a symbol corresponding to “B_ART” are displayed at the same time, so “D_ART” and “B_ART” overlap. You can clearly notify that you have won.

[Table number determination table for general and CZ stock]
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a table number determination table for general and CZ stock will be described.
General and CZ stock table number determination table determines the table number that is part of the winning information by winning “D_ART” or “B_ART” in the ART lottery during non-ART and non-bonus Referenced in case.

  The table number determination table at the time of general stock and CZ stock defines the first lottery table type value ("0" to "5") and the table number set according to the lottery flag A-1. As shown in FIG. 91, when referring to the table number determination table for general and CZ stock, “0” is always determined as the table number.

[ART lottery table when finalizing]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 96, the determined lottery ART lottery table will be described.
The determined lottery ART lottery table is referred to when performing an ART lottery at the time of a finalized combination. This determined lottery ART lottery table shows the correspondence between the lottery result values ("0" to "12") corresponding to the contents of winning the ART and the lottery values set according to the lottery flag A-2. .

  In the present embodiment, “at the time of a final winning combination” indicates a game in which an internal winning combination that always wins any ART is determined. Therefore, when the ART lottery is performed using the determined lottery ART lottery table, a value other than “0 (out)” is determined as the lottery result value.

  In the ART lottery using the determined lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is assigned to each lottery value. Subtract sequentially with the lottery value specified in. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 92 shows an ART lottery table (part 1) at the time of a confirmed combination. In the confirmed lottery ART lottery table (part 1), “0” is assigned as the value of the second lottery table type. The second lottery table type is used when determining a table number with reference to a table number determination table (see FIG. 97) at the time of stock at the time of a decisive role described later.

  The determined lottery ART lottery table (part 1) is referred to when the sub game state is the “general state”. When performing an ART lottery with reference to the final lottery table (No. 1), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is “2 (Billy Bonus)”, the value of the lottery result is “1 (B_ART “Today)” is definitely decided.

  FIG. 93 shows an ART lottery table (No. 2) at the determined combination. This determined lottery ART lottery table (part 2) is referred to when “1” is assigned as the value of the second lottery table type and the sub gaming state is “chance zone (CZ)”. When performing an ART lottery with reference to the determined lottery table (part 2), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is “2 (Billy Bonus)”, the value of the lottery result is “4 (B_ART & G_ART). “Today)” is definitely decided.

  FIG. 94 shows an ART lottery table (No. 3) at the determined combination. In this final lottery table (part 3), “2” is assigned as the value of the second lottery table type, and the sub gaming state is “general state” or “chance zone (CZ)”. Referred to when “ART precursor”. Here, “ART precursor” is a period from when “ART” is won until the game of the number of ART precursors determined by lottery is consumed.

  When performing an ART lottery with reference to the final lottery table (part 3), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is “2 (Billy Bonus)”, the value of the lottery result is “7 (G_ART “Today)” is definitely decided.

  FIG. 95 shows an ART lottery table (No. 4) at the time of a confirmed combination. This final lottery table (part 4) is assigned with “3” as the value of the second lottery table type, and when the sub gaming state is “ART” and the sub gaming state is “general state”. Alternatively, it is referred to when it is “chance zone” and “ART is being prepared”. Here, “ART ready” means between one or a plurality of games from the end of “ART warning” to the start of “ART”.

  For example, if the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state in the state in which the “ART precursor” has ended, it is necessary to shift the RT gaming state to the RT2 gaming state in order to start “ART” There is. Therefore, if the RT gaming state is the RT0 gaming state or the RT1 gaming state when the “pre-ART warning” ends, “RT ready” and “RT2 transition "Is stopped and displayed, and the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state.

  Note that the gaming machine of the present invention may be configured to start “ART” without going through “ART ready” after the end of “ART warning”. In this case, the stop order for stopping and displaying “RT2 transition lip” is notified to “RT sign”, and the RT gaming state is surely shifted to the RT2 gaming state. “Preparing ART” is omitted.

  When performing an ART lottery with reference to the final lottery table (part 4), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is “2 (Billy Bonus)”, the value of the lottery result is “7 (G_ART “Today)” is definitely decided.

  FIG. 96 shows an ART lottery table (No. 5) at the determined combination. In the final lottery table (No. 5), “4” is assigned as the value of the second lottery table type, the sub gaming state is “ART”, and “Viking Rush (VR)” is executed. Referenced when. When performing an ART lottery with reference to the final lottery table (No. 5), for example, if the lottery flag A-2 is “1 (freeze + don)”, the value of the lottery result is “12 ( B_ART & D_ART & G_ART winning & VR winning) "is always determined.

  In the present embodiment, when “12 (B_ART & D_ART & G_ART winning & VR winning)” is determined as the value of the lottery result, the game lock is determined. When the determined game lock occurs, the liquid crystal display device 11 corresponds to the symbol corresponding to “B_ART”, the symbol corresponding to “D_ART”, the symbol corresponding to “G_ART”, and “VR”. Are displayed at the same time. Thereby, the player can recognize that “B_ART”, “D_ART”, “G_ART”, and “VR” are won in duplicate.

[Table number determination table at the time of stock at the final position]
Next, with reference to FIG. 97, the table number determination table at the time of the stock at the fixed combination will be described.
The table number determination table for stock at the time of a confirmed combination is referred to when various “ART” are won in the ART lottery at the time of “determined combination” and a table number which is a part of the winning information is determined.

  The table number determination table at the time of the stock at the time of a fixed combination defines the value of the second lottery table type (“0” to “4”) and the table number set according to the lottery flag A-2. As shown in FIG. 97, when the value of the lottery flag A-2 is “2 (Billy bonus)” and the value of the second table type is “4 (in VR)”, the table number is “1”. Is determined. If the value of the lottery flag A-2 is “2 (Billy bonus)” and the value of the ART lottery table type is “0 (general)”, “3” is determined as the table number.

[B_ART ART lottery table]
Next, the ART lottery table during B_ART will be described with reference to FIGS.
The ART lottery table during B_ART is referred to when performing ART lottery in “B_ART”. This B_ART ART lottery table is a lottery set according to the lottery result values ("0" to "8" and "13" to "16") corresponding to the winning contents of the ART and the lottery flag A-3. Indicates the correspondence with the value.

  In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during B_ART, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is determined for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 98 shows an ART lottery table (part 1) during B_ART. In the ART lottery table (No. 1) during B_ART, “0” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. The third lottery table type is used when determining a table number with reference to a table number determination table (see FIG. 122) for stock during B_ART and D_ART, which will be described later.

  The ART lottery table during B_ART (part 1) is “setting 1”, “ART mode 0 to 1” and “between non-flags”, and “the game whose ART start G number is determined” or the number of ART games is Referred to when “last (remaining) more than 5G”.

  In the present embodiment, when the sub game state is “B_ART” or “D_ART”, four “ART modes” are provided. That is, “ART mode 0”, “ART mode 1”, “ART mode 2”, and “ART mode 3” are provided. The ART lottery table during B_ART is provided according to each “ART mode”. As a result, even in the same “B_ART”, the “ART mode” is different, so that the probability of winning “G_ART” can be made different.

  The “game for which the ART start G (game) number has been determined” is a game in which “ART” is started. In this embodiment, in the game where “ART” is started, the ART start G number is determined, and the determined ART start G number is set in the ART game number counter. Therefore, the subtraction of the ART game number counter is started from the game next to the game for which the ART start G number has been determined. Therefore, in the present embodiment, an ART lottery table during B_ART to be referred to in the “game in which the ART start G number is determined”, which is a game in which “B_ART” is started, is defined.

  FIG. 99 shows an ART lottery table (part 2) during B_ART. In the ART lottery table during B_ART (part 2), “1” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This B_ART ART lottery table (part 2) is “setting 1”, “ART mode 2”, and “between non-flags”, and “the game in which the ART start G number is determined” or the number of ART games is “ It is referred to when “last (remaining) is greater than 5G”.

  FIG. 100 shows an ART lottery table (No. 3) during B_ART. In the ART lottery table (No. 3) during B_ART, “2” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This B_ART ART lottery table (part 3) is “setting 1”, “ART mode 3” and “between non-flags”, and the “game for which the ART start G number is determined” or the ART game number is “ It is referred to when “last (remaining) is greater than 5G”.

  FIG. 101 shows an ART lottery table (No. 4) during B_ART. In the ART lottery table (No. 4) during B_ART, “3” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This B_ART ART lottery table (part 4) is “setting 1”, “ART modes 0 to 3”, “between non-flags”, and the number of ART games is “last (remaining) 5G or less”. Referenced in case.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of ART games of “B_ART” becomes “last (remaining) 5G or less”, even if the “ART mode” is different, a common B_ART ART lottery table is referred to. In this embodiment, when the number of ART games of “B_ART” becomes “Last (remaining) 5G or less”, the probability of winning “ART” is more than the case where the number of ART games is “greater than last (remaining) 5G”. Is low.

  As a result, when the number of ART games of “B_ART” is “last (remaining) 5G or less”, after this “B_ART” is finished, a continuous effect is provided to notify whether or not the next “ART” is started. In addition, the probability of winning “ART” during the continuous performance can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to reduce the chance of notifying the winning of “ART” in the middle of the continuous production in “B_ART”, and it is possible to prevent a continuous production with an uncomfortable feeling from being executed.

  FIG. 102 shows an ART lottery table (No. 5) during B_ART. In the ART lottery table (No. 5) during B_ART, “4” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This B_ART ART lottery table (No. 5) is “Setting 1”, “ART modes 0 to 3”, “Flag established (BB, RB established)”, and “Game for which ART start G number is determined” "Or the number of ART games is referred to when" there is more than the last (remaining) 5G ".

  FIG. 103 shows an ART lottery table (No. 6) during B_ART. In the ART lottery table (No. 6) during B_ART, “5” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This B_ART ART lottery table (No. 6) has “setting 1”, “ART modes 0 to 3”, “flag establishment (BB, RB establishment)”, and the number of ART games is “last (remaining)”. It is referred to when it is “5G or less”.

  104 to 109 show the ART lottery table during B_ART (No. 7) to the ART lottery table during B_ART (No. 12). The ART lottery table during B_ART (part 7) to the ART lottery table during B_ART (part 12) are referred to in the case of “setting 6”.

  As shown in FIGS. 98 to 109, when performing ART lottery using the ART lottery table during B_ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “6 (weak ice)” or “7 (strong ice)”, There is a possibility that “7 (G_ART winning)” is determined as the value of the lottery result. For example, when referring to the ART lottery table (No. 1) during B_ART shown in FIG. 98, if the lottery flag A-3 is “7 (strong ice)”, the value of the lottery result is “1/2” with a probability of 1/2. 7 (G_ART winning) "is determined.

The internal winning combination relating to weak ice (small role / replay data pointer “10”) and strong ice (small role / replay data pointer “11”) is a specific example of “first special role” according to the present invention. Is.
Therefore, when “first special combination” is determined as an internal winning combination during “B_ART” in the second assist state, the ART lottery of the game is more effective than when “second special combination” is determined. The probability of winning the “G_ART” in the third assist state is high.

  In the present embodiment, when the “second special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination during “B_ART” in the second assist state, the “first special combination” is determined to be added. There is a high probability that the number of added games will be determined in the game number lottery. That is, when the “second special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination during “B_ART”, the number of ART games is expected to be added more than when the “first special combination” is determined.

[ART lottery table during D_ART]
Next, the ART lottery table during D_ART will be described with reference to FIGS.
The ART lottery table during D_ART is referred to when performing ART lottery in “D_ART”. This ART lottery table during D_ART is a lottery set in accordance with the lottery result values ("0" to "8" and "13" to "16") corresponding to the winning contents of the ART and the lottery flag A-3. Indicates the correspondence with the value.

  The D_ART ART lottery table is provided in accordance with each “ART mode”. As a result, even in the same “D_ART”, since the “ART mode” is different, for example, the probability of winning “G_ART” can be varied.

  In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during D_ART, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, 0-32767, random number denominator = 32768) is determined for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 110 shows an ART lottery table (part 1) during D_ART. In the D_ART ART lottery table (part 1), “6” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This D_ART ART lottery table (part 1) is “setting 1”, “ART mode 0 to 1” and “between non-flags”, and “the game whose ART start G number is determined” or the number of ART games Is referred to when “more than the last (remaining) 5G”.

  FIG. 111 shows an ART lottery table (part 2) during D_ART. In the D_ART ART lottery table (part 2), “7” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This D_ART ART lottery table (part 2) is “setting 1”, “ART mode 2” and “between non-flags”, and “the game whose ART start G number is determined” or the number of ART games is “ It is referred to when “last (remaining) is greater than 5G”.

  FIG. 112 shows an ART lottery table (part 3) during D_ART. In the D_ART ART lottery table (part 3), “8” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This D_ART ART lottery table (part 3) is “setting 1”, “ART mode 3” and “between non-flags”, and “the game whose ART start G number is determined” or the number of ART games is “ It is referred to when “last (remaining) is greater than 5G”.

  FIG. 113 shows an ART lottery table (part 4) during D_ART. In the D_ART ART lottery table (part 4), “9” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This D_ART ART lottery table (part 4) is “setting 1”, “ART modes 0 to 3”, “between non-flags”, and the number of ART games is “last (remaining) 5G or less”. Referenced in case.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of ART games of “D_ART” becomes “last (remaining) 5G or less”, even if the “ART mode” is different, the common ART lottery table during D_ART is referred to. In this embodiment, when the number of ART games of “D_ART” becomes “Last (remaining) 5G or less”, the probability of winning “ART” is higher than when the number of ART games is “greater than (last) 5G”. Is low. As a result, the chance of notifying the winning of “ART” during the continuous production in “D_ART” is reduced, and it is possible to prevent a continuous production with a sense of incongruity from being executed.

  FIG. 114 shows an ART lottery table (No. 5) during D_ART. In the D_ART ART lottery table (No. 5), “10” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. The D_ART ART lottery table (No. 5) is “setting 1”, “ART modes 0 to 3”, “flag establishment (BB, RB establishment)”, and “game for which ART start G number is determined” "Or the number of ART games is referred to when it is" Last (remaining) greater than 5G ".

  FIG. 115 shows an ART lottery table (No. 6) during D_ART. In the D_ART ART lottery table (No. 6), “11” is assigned as the value of the third lottery table type. This D_ART ART lottery table (No. 6) has “setting 1”, “ART modes 0 to 3”, “flag establishment (BB, RB establishment)”, and the number of ART games is “last (remaining)”. It is referred to when it is “5G or less”.

  116 to 121 show an ART lottery table during D_ART (part 7) to an ART lottery table during D_ART (part 12). The ART lottery table during D_ART (part 7) to the ART lottery table during D_ART (part 12) are referred to in the case of “setting 6”.

  As shown in FIGS. 110 to 121, when performing ART lottery using the ART lottery table during D_ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “8 (weak cherry)” or “9 (strong cherry)”, There is a possibility that “7 (G_ART winning)” is determined as the value of the lottery result. For example, when referring to the ART lottery table during D_ART shown in FIG. 110 (part 1), if the lottery flag A-3 is “9 (strong cherry)”, the value of the lottery result is “1” with a probability of 1/4. 7 (G_ART winning) "is determined.

The internal winning combination relating to the weak cherry (small role / replay data pointer “12”) and strong cherry (small role / replay data pointer “13”, “14”) is one of the “second special roles” according to the present invention. A specific example is shown.
Therefore, when the “second special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination during “D_ART” in the first assist state, the ART lottery of the game is more effective than the case where the “first special combination” is determined. The probability of winning the “G_ART” in the third assist state is high.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when “first special combination” is determined as an internal winning combination during “D_ART” in the first assist state, it continues more than when “second special combination” is determined. There is a high probability that the continuous stock will win in the stock lottery. That is, when the “first special role” is determined as the internal winning combination during “D_ART”, the execution of the next set of “D_ART” is expected more than when the “second special role” is determined. The

[Table number determination table for stock during B_ART and D_ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 122, a table number determination table at the time of stock during B_ART and D_ART will be described.
The table number determination table at the time of stock during B_ART and D_ART is when various “ART” is won in the ART lottery during “B_ART” or “D_ART” and the table number which is a part of the winning information is determined. Referenced.

  The table number determination table at the time of stock during B_ART and D_ART specifies the value of the third lottery table type (“0” to “11”) and the table number set according to the lottery flag A-3. As shown in FIG. 122, when referring to the table number determination table during stocking during B_ART and D_ART, “1” is always determined as the table number.

[ART lottery table during G_ART]
Next, the ART lottery table during G_ART will be described with reference to FIGS.
The ART lottery table during G_ART is referred to when performing ART lottery in “G_ART”. The ART lottery table during G_ART is a lottery set in accordance with the lottery result values ("0" to "6", "8", and "16") corresponding to the winning contents of the ART and the lottery flag A-3. Indicates the correspondence with the value.

  In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during G_ART, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is determined for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 123 shows an ART lottery table (part 1) during G_ART. This G_ART ART lottery table (part 1) is assigned “0” as the value of the fourth lottery table type, and is referred to when it is “union mode 0” and “between non-flags”. The fourth lottery table type is used when determining a table number with reference to a table number determination table (see FIG. 131) for stock during G_ART and R_ART, which will be described later.

  In this embodiment, when the sub gaming state is “G_ART” or “R_ART”, three “merging modes” are provided. That is, the “merging mode 0”, “merging mode 1”, and “merging mode 2” are provided. The ART lottery table during G_ART is provided according to each “merging mode”. As a result, even in the same “G_ART”, since the “merging mode” is different, for example, the probability of winning “B_ART” or “D_ART” can be varied.

  FIG. 124 shows an ART lottery table (part 2) during G_ART. This G_ART ART lottery table (part 2) is assigned “1” as the value of the fourth lottery table type, and is referred to when it is “union mode 1” and “between non-flags”.

  FIG. 125 shows an ART lottery table (part 3) during G_ART. This G_ART ART lottery table (No. 3) is assigned “2” as the value of the fourth lottery table type, and is referred to when it is “union mode 2” and “between non-flags”.

  FIG. 126 shows an ART lottery table (part 4) during G_ART. This G_ART ART lottery table (part 4) is assigned “3” as the value of the fourth lottery table type, and is referred to when “union mode 0” and “flag establishment (BB, RB establishment)”. Is done.

  FIG. 127 shows an ART lottery table (part 5) during G_ART. This G_ART ART lottery table (No. 5) is assigned with “4” as the value of the fourth lottery table type, and is referred to when “union mode 1” and “flag establishment (BB, RB establishment)”. Is done.

  FIG. 128 shows an ART lottery table (No. 6) during G_ART. In the G_ART ART lottery table (No. 6), “5” is assigned as the value of the fourth lottery ART lottery table type, and “union mode 2” and “flag establishment (BB, RB establishment)” are set. To be referenced.

  As shown in FIGS. 123 to 128, when the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table during G_ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “6 (weak ice)” or “7 (strong ice)”. There is a possibility that “2 (D_ART winning)” is determined as the value of the lottery result. For example, if the lottery flag A-3 is “7 (strong ice)” when referring to the ART lottery table during G_ART shown in FIG. 123 (part 1), the lottery result value is “256 (32768)”. 2 (D_ART winning) "is determined.

The internal winning combination relating to weak ice (small role / replay data pointer “10”) and strong ice (small role / replay data pointer “11”) is a specific example of “first special role” according to the present invention. Is.
Therefore, when the “first special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination during “G_ART” in the third assist state, the ART lottery of the game is more effective than the case where the “second special combination” is determined. The probability of winning the “D_ART” that is the first assist state is high.

  Further, when performing ART lottery using the ART lottery table during G_ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “8 (weak cherry)” or “9 (strong cherry)”, the lottery result value is “1 ( B_ART winning) ”may be determined. For example, when the lottery flag A-3 is “9 (strong cherry)” when referring to the ART lottery table (No. 1) during G_ART shown in FIG. 123, the value of the lottery result is “2512/32768”. 1 (B_ART winning) "is determined.

The internal winning combination relating to the weak cherry (small role / replay data pointer “12”) and strong cherry (small role / replay data pointer “13”, “14”) is one of the “second special roles” according to the present invention. A specific example is shown.
Therefore, when “second special combination” is determined as an internal winning combination during “G_ART” in the third assist state, the ART lottery of the game is more effective than when “first special combination” is determined. The probability of winning the “B_ART” in the second assist state is high.

[ART lottery table during R_ART]
Next, the ART lottery table during R_ART will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 and 130.
The R_ART ART lottery table is referred to when performing ART lottery in “R_ART”. In the R_ART ART lottery table, the lottery result values (“0” to “6”, “8”, and “16”) corresponding to the winning contents of the ART and the lottery flag A-3 are set. Indicates the correspondence with the value.

  In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during R_ART, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (in this embodiment, 0-32767, random number denominator = 32768) is determined for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 129 shows an ART lottery table (part 1) during R_ART. This R_ART ART lottery table (part 1) is assigned “6” as the value of the fourth lottery table type, and is referred to when it is “between non-flags”.

  FIG. 130 shows an ART lottery table (part 2) during R_ART. This R_ART ART lottery table (part 2) is assigned “7” as the value of the fourth lottery table type, and is referred to when “flag established (BB, RB established)”.

  As shown in FIG. 129 and FIG. 130, when the ART lottery is performed with reference to the ART lottery table during R_ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “6 (weak ice)” or “7 (strong ice)”. There is a possibility that “2 (D_ART winning)” is determined as the value of the lottery result. For example, when the lottery flag A-3 is “7 (strong ice)” when referring to the ART lottery table during G_ART shown in FIG. 129 (part 1), the lottery result value is “2 (D_ART winning)”. Is definitely determined.

The internal winning combination relating to weak ice (small role / replay data pointer “10”) and strong ice (small role / replay data pointer “11”) is a specific example of “first special role” according to the present invention. Is.
Therefore, when “first special combination” is determined as an internal winning combination during “R_ART”, in the ART lottery of the game, in the first assist state, rather than when “second special combination” is determined. There is a high probability of winning a certain “D_ART”.

  Further, when performing an ART lottery with reference to the ART lottery table during R_ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “8 (weak cherry)” or “9 (strong cherry)”, the value of the lottery result is “1”. (B_ART winning) may be determined. For example, when referring to the ART lottery table (No. 1) during R_ART shown in FIG. 129, if the lottery flag A-3 is “9 (strong cherry)”, the value of the lottery result is “1 (B_ART winning)”. Is definitely determined.

The internal winning combination relating to the weak cherry (small role / replay data pointer “12”) and strong cherry (small role / replay data pointer “13”, “14”) is one of the “second special roles” according to the present invention. A specific example is shown.
Therefore, when the “second special combination” is determined as the internal winning combination during “R_ART”, in the second lottery state in the ART lottery of the game, compared to the case where the “first special combination” is determined. There is a high probability of winning a certain “B_ART”.

[Table number determination table for stock during G_ART and R_ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 131, a table number determination table for stock during G_ART and R_ART will be described.
The table number determination table at the time of stock during G_ART and R_ART is when various “ART” is won in the ART lottery during “G_ART” or “R_ART” and the table number which is a part of the winning information is determined. Referenced.

  The table number determination table at the time of stock during G_ART and R_ART defines the table number set according to the value of the fourth lottery table type (“0” to “7”) and the lottery flag A-3. As shown in FIG. 131, when referring to the table number determination table for stock during G_ART and R_ART, “1” is always determined as the table number.

[ART stock area sorting lottery table during ART]
Next, the ART stock area allocation lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 to 135.
The ART stock area allocation lottery table during ART is referred to when “D_ART” or “B_ART” is won in an ART lottery during various ARTs and a stock area for storing the information is determined.

  The ART stock area sorting lottery table during ART shows the correspondence between the lottery result value ("0" or "1") corresponding to the ART stock area and the lottery value set according to the lottery flag A-3. .

  In the stock area allocation using the ART stock area allocation lottery table shown in FIGS. 132 to 135, first, it is extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment). The random number values are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined for each lottery result value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won. The above-described stock area allocation is performed in an ART lottery process (see FIG. 249) described later.

  FIG. 132 shows an ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 1) during ART. This ART stock area allocation lottery table (part 1) is referred to when “B_ART” is won in “all ARTs other than coalescing mode 2 in C_ART” and “all in preparation”. As shown in FIG. 132, when “B_ART” is won by the ART lottery during the above-mentioned ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “6 (weak ice)”, the value of the lottery result is “1 ( ART stock area B) "is determined with a probability of about 1/5.

  FIG. 133 shows an ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 2) during ART. This ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 2) is referred to when “D_ART” is won in “all in ART other than coalescing mode 2 in C_ART” and “all in preparation”. As shown in FIG. 133, when “D_ART” is won by the ART lottery during the above-mentioned ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “6 (weak ice)”, the value of the lottery result is “1 ( ART stock area B) "is determined with a probability of about 1/5.

  FIG. 134 shows an ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 3) during ART. This ART stock area allocation lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when “B_ART” is won in the “art in merge mode 2 during C_ART (not included during preparation)”. As shown in FIG. 134, when “B_ART” is won by the ART lottery during the above-mentioned ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “6 (weak ice)”, the value of the lottery result is “0 ( The ART stock area A) ”is always determined.

  FIG. 135 shows an ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 4) during ART. This ART stock area sorting lottery table (part 4) is referred to when “D_ART” is won in “During ART of merge mode 2 in C_ART (not included in preparation)”. As shown in FIG. 135, when “D_ART” is won by the ART lottery during the above-mentioned ART, if the lottery flag A-3 is “6 (weak ice)”, the value of the lottery result is “0 ( The ART stock area A) ”is always determined.

  In the present embodiment, the winning information of “D_ART” or “B_ART” stored in the “ART stock area A” is reported in principle. However, the winning information “D_ART” or “B_ART” stored in the “ART stock area A” may not be displayed (notified). This is because whether or not to display (notify) the winning information stored in the “ART stock area A” is determined based on an effect lottery process described later in each game. Note that the winning information of “D_ART” or “B_ART” stored in the “ART stock area B” is not necessarily displayed (notified).

[ART lottery table during bonus (BB, Billy bonus)]
Next, the ART lottery table during bonus (BB, billy bonus) will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137.
The ART lottery table during bonus (BB, Billy bonus) is referred to when performing ART lottery during bonus. The ART lottery table during this bonus (BB, Billy bonus) includes a lottery result value ("0" to "14") corresponding to the winning content of the ART, and a lottery value set according to the lottery flag B-1. The correspondence relationship is shown.

  In the ART lottery that refers to the ART lottery table during the bonus (BB, billy bonus), first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) A lottery value defined for each lottery result value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 136 shows an ART lottery table (No. 1) during the bonus (BB, Billy bonus). The ART lottery table (No. 1) in this bonus (BB, Billy bonus) is assigned “0” as the value of the fifth lottery table type, and is referred to when “base ART is not set”. The fifth lottery table type is used when determining a table number with reference to a table number determination table (see FIG. 138) for bonus stock during the following.

  FIG. 137 shows the ART lottery table (No. 2) during the bonus (BB, Billy bonus). The ART lottery table (No. 2) during this bonus (BB, Billy bonus) is assigned “1” as the value of the fifth lottery table type, and is referred to when “base ART is set”.

  Here, “the base ART is not set” means that the sub game state before the bonus is activated is not “ART”. In other words, when “base ART is not set”, the bonus game is finished, and the sub gaming state shifts to “general state” or “chance zone”.

  On the other hand, “base ART is set” means that the sub gaming state before the bonus is activated was any “ART”. That is, if “base ART is set”, the sub gaming state returns to “ART” when the operation of the bonus is completed. During the bonus operation, the sub gaming state shifts to “bonus”.

  Specifically, if “0” is stored in “ART identification data storage area” of a sub storage area (see FIG. 218) described later (unless “1” or “2” is stored), It is determined that “base ART is not set”. If “1” or “2” is stored in the “ART identification data storage area”, it is determined that “base ART is set”. If “1” is stored in the “ART identification data storage area”, “Base ART” is “D_ART”, and “2” is stored in the “ART identification data storage area”. , “Base ART” is “B_ART”.

[Table number determination table for stock during bonus]
Next, with reference to FIG. 138, a table number determination table at the time of stock during bonus will be described.
The table number determination table at the time of stock during bonus is referred to when various “ART” is won in the ART lottery in which the bonus is operating and the table number which is a part of the winning information is determined.

  The table number determination table at the time of stock during bonus defines the value of the fifth lottery table type (“0” or “1”) and the table number set according to the lottery flag B-1. As shown in FIG. 138, when the value of the lottery flag B-1 is “2 (BB_JAC)” when referring to the table number determination table at the time of stock during bonus, the value of the fifth lottery table type is any. Even so, “3” is determined as the table number.

[Special ART lottery table]
Next, the special ART lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 and 140.
The special ART lottery table includes a lottery result value (“0” to “14”) corresponding to the winning content of ART and a lottery value set according to the presence / absence (set / not set) of “base ART”. The correspondence is shown.

  In the ART lottery referring to the special ART lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially with the lottery values. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 139 shows a special ART lottery table (part 1). This special ART lottery table (part 1) is assigned “0” as the value of the sixth lottery table type, and is referred to when it is “at the time of bonus completion (during billy bonus)”. The sixth lottery table type is used when determining a table number with reference to a table number determination table (see FIG. 141) at the time of special ART described later.

  Here, “when bonus is completed” means that during the operation of the billy bonus (BB3 gaming state), the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination with “1” medal payout is displayed 15 times, This is when the bonus ends. That is, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination in which the payout of medals is “15” is displayed and the billy bonus is ended, it is not “at the time of bonus completion”.

  As shown in FIG. 139, in the present embodiment, “5 (D_ART & G_ART winning)” is always determined as the value of the lottery result when “bonus completion”. In other words, if it is “when the bonus is completed”, the player always wins “ART”.

  FIG. 140 shows a special ART lottery table (part 2). This special ART lottery table (part 2) is assigned “1” as the value of the sixth lottery table type, and is referred to when it is “at the time of ceiling”.

  Here, “at the ceiling” means when a predetermined number of games have been consumed after the bonus ends. As shown in FIG. 140, in the present embodiment, “6 (B_ART & D_ART & G_ART winning)” is always determined as the lottery result value when “at ceiling”. That is, if it is “at the ceiling”, be sure to win “ART”.

[Table number determination table for special ART]
Next, a table number determination table at the time of special ART will be described with reference to FIG.
The table number determination table at the time of special ART is referred to when various “ART” wins and determines the table number which is a part of the winning information in the ART lottery “at the time of bonus completion” and “at the ceiling” .

  The table number determination table at the time of special ART specifies the table number set according to the value of the sixth lottery table type (“0” or “1”) and the presence / absence (set / not set) of “base ART” To do. As shown in FIG. 141, when the table number determination table at the time of special ART is referred to, if “base ART is not set” and the value of the sixth lottery table type is “0 (when bonus is completed)” “5” is determined as the table number.

[ART stock non-consumption lottery table]
Next, the ART stock non-consumed lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 and 143.
The ART stock non-consumed lottery table shows the correspondence between lottery result values ("0" or "1") corresponding to "consumption" and "non-consumption" and lottery values set according to the table number. .

  In the present embodiment, every time “D_ART” or “B_ART” stored in “ART stock area A” or “ART stock area B” is started, the ART stock non-consumption lottery is performed. In this ART stock non-consumption lottery, whether or not the winning information of “D_ART” or “B_ART” to be started is deleted (consumed) from “ART stock region A” or “ART stock region B” is determined. .

  That is, in this embodiment, when “non-consumption” is won in the ART stock non-consumption lottery, “D_ART” or “B_ART” stored in “ART stock area A” or “ART stock area B” is won. Do not delete information. As a result, two “ARTs” are started using the winning information of one “ART”.

  As described above, in this embodiment, every time “D_ART” or “B_ART” stored in “ART stock area A” or “ART stock area B” is started, an ART stock non-consumption lottery is performed. Therefore, when “NO CONSUMPTION” continues to be won in the ART stock non-consumption lottery, “ART” multiple times are started using the same “ART” winning information.

  In an ART stock non-consumable lottery that refers to an ART stock non-consumed lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as a lottery result. The lottery value specified for each value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 142 shows an ART stock non-consumed lottery table (part 1). This ART stock non-consumption lottery table (part 1) is referred to when “setting 1” is set. For example, when referring to the ART stock non-consumed lottery table (No. 1), if the table number in the winning information of “ART” to be started is “0”, the lottery result is obtained with a probability of 256/32768. “1 (non-consumption)” is determined as the value.

  FIG. 143 shows the ART stock non-consumed lottery table (part 2). This ART stock non-consumption lottery table (part 2) is referred to when it is “setting 6”. For example, when referring to the ART stock non-consumed lottery table (No. 2), if the table number in the winning information of “ART” to be started is “0”, the lottery result is obtained with a probability of 384/32768. “1 (non-consumption)” is determined as the value.

[ART lottery result stock content determination table]
Next, an ART lottery result stock content determination table will be described with reference to FIG.
The ART lottery result stock content determination table shows the correspondence between the lottery result values ("0" to "14") corresponding to the ART winning content and the stock contents of various "ART" and "VR".

  As shown in FIG. 144, when “6” is determined as a lottery result value by any ART lottery, “B_ART” winning information, “D_ART” winning information, and “G_ART” winning information are determined. Information is stored in a sub-storage area (see FIG. 218) described later.

[Bill touch correct / incorrect lottery table when VR is locked]
Next, with reference to FIG. 145, a VR-billed billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery table will be described.
The billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery table at the time of VR lock is referred to when billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery is performed at the time of VR lock.

  In the present embodiment, when the VR lock (game lock 9) is determined during various “ART”, “VR (Viking Rush)” is won (see FIGS. 94 to 96). Then, when “VR” is won, a billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery is performed to determine the correct / incorrect touch of the character (billy) decorations 22L and 22R.

  Thereafter, VR lock (game lock 9) is executed to notify the player to select and touch one of the character decoration portions 22L and 22R. When the character decoration touched by the player is correct, “VR” is started. The effect for determining whether or not to start this “VR” is a specific example of an alternative effect introduction effect according to the present invention.

  The VR lock billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery table depends on the value (“0” to “6”) of the lottery result corresponding to the correct / incorrect touch of the character decorations 22L and 22R and the sub game state. The correspondence relationship with the lottery value set in the above is shown.

  In the billy touch correct answer / incorrect answer lottery referring to the VR lock billy touch correct answer / incorrect answer lottery table, first, from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 in this embodiment, random number denominator = 32768). The extracted random numbers are sequentially subtracted by lottery values defined for each lottery result value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  In the VR lock billy touch correct / incorrect lottery table, the content corresponding to the value of the lottery result “0” indicates that the touch on the character decoration portion 22R (right) is correct, and the character decoration portions 22L and 22R are correct. Make the correct answer when there is no touch. The content corresponding to the value of the lottery result “1” is incorrect when the touch on the character decoration 22R (right) is correct and there is no touch on the character decoration 22L, 22R.

  The content corresponding to the value of the lottery result “2” is correct when the touch on the character decoration 22L (left) is correct and there is no touch on the character decoration 22L, 22R. The content corresponding to the value of the lottery result “3” is incorrect when the touch on the character decoration 22L (left) is correct and there is no touch on the character decoration 22L, 22R.

  Further, the content corresponding to the value of the lottery result “4” is correct even if either of the character decoration portions 22L and 22R is touched (both), and is correct even if there is no touch on the character decoration portions 22L and 22R. To do. The content corresponding to the value of the lottery result “5” is incorrect even if either of the character decoration portions 22L and 22R is touched (both), and there is no need to touch the character decoration portions 22L and 22R. Make it correct.

  In the present embodiment, “5” is not determined as the value of the lottery result. That is, when the VR lock (game lock 9) is executed, a touch on at least one of the character decoration portions 22L and 22R is correct.

  As shown in FIG. 145, when the sub game state when the lottery of the billy touch correct answer / incorrect answer is “general (game at the end of ART)”, “B_ART” or “D_ART”, the lottery result One of “0” to “3” is won as the value of. Each of the lottery result values “0” to “3” has a winning probability of 8192/32768 (1/4).

  Accordingly, when the VR lock (game lock 9) is executed in “general (game at the end of ART)”, “B_ART”, or “D_ART”, one of the character decoration portions 22L and 22R is touched. In this case, the answer is correct with a probability of 1/2. Even if neither of the character decoration parts 22L, 22R is touched (does not participate in the production), the answer is correct with a probability of 1/2.

  On the other hand, if the sub gaming state when the billy touch correct answer / incorrect answer lottery is “G_ART”, “R_ART” or “VR”, “4” is always won as the value of the lottery result. That is, “VR (Viking Rush)” is always started when a VR lock (game lock 9) is executed in “G_ART”, “R_ART”, or “VR”.

[VR billy touch lottery table]
Next, the VR billy touch lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.
The VR billy touch lottery table is referred to when the billy touch correct answer / wrong answer lottery is performed during “VR (Viking Rush)”. In the VR billy touch lottery table, the lottery result values (“0” to “6”) corresponding to correct / incorrect touches on the character decoration units 22L and 22R and the “lottery flag A-3” or “established” are established. The correspondence relationship with the lottery value set according to the “type of bonus” is shown.

  In the billy touch correct / incorrect lottery referring to the VR billy touch lottery table, first, a random value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used. Then, the lottery value specified for each lottery result value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 146 shows a VR billy touch lottery table (part 1). This VR billy touch lottery table (part 1) is referred to when “between non-flags”. As shown in FIG. 146, when the value of the lottery flag A-3 is “1” to “5” when referring to the VR billy touch lottery table (part 1), the character decorations 22L and 22R If either one is touched, the answer is correct with a probability of 1/2. Even if neither of the character decoration parts 22L, 22R is touched (does not participate in the production), the answer is correct with a probability of 1/2.

  FIG. 147 shows a VR billy touch lottery table (part 2). This VR billy touch lottery table (part 2) is referred to when it is “during Viking Rush Extra” and “between non-flags”. When referring to the VR billy touch lottery table (part 2), if the value of the lottery flag A-3 is “1” to “5”, one of the character decoration portions 22L and 22R is touched. Even if there is no touch on either, the answer is correct with a probability of 1/2.

  FIG. 148 shows a VR billy touch lottery table (part 3). This VR billy touch lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when “when bonus is established”. FIG. 149 shows a VR billy touch lottery table (part 4). The VR billy touch lottery table (No. 4) is referred to when “Viking Rush Extra” and “Bonus is established”.

  As shown in FIGS. 148 and 149, when a bonus is established during VR, “4” is always won as the value of the lottery result in the billy touch lottery. That is, the answer is always correct regardless of whether one of the character decoration portions 22L and 22R is touched or not touched.

[VR revolution lottery table]
Next, the VR revolution lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 150 to 164.
The VR lottery lottery table is referred to when the revolution lottery in “VR (Viking Rush)” is performed. This revolution lottery is performed for each touch challenge (touch effect) in “VR”.

  The VR revolution lottery table is set according to the lottery result value (“0” or “1”) corresponding to the presence / absence of “revolution activation” and “lottery flag A-3” or “type of bonus established”. The correspondence with the lottery value made is shown. In “Revolution lottery”, when “Revolution activation” is won, all the results of the previous touch challenge (touch production) are rewritten to the correct answer.

  In the revolution lottery that refers to the VR revolution lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is determined for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 150 shows a VR revolution revolution lottery table (part 1). This VR revolution revolution lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when “setting 1”, “between non-flags”, and “first touch challenge number”. FIG. 151 shows a VR revolution revolution lottery table (part 2). This VR revolution lottery table (No. 2) is referred to when it is “setting 1”, “between non-flags”, and “second touch challenge count”.

  If you win the “Revolution Trigger”, all the results of the previous touch challenge will be correct, so the player wants to win the “Revolution Trigger” when the number of “Touch Challenges” is as high as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “revolution activation” is not won in the revolution lottery performed after “the first touch challenge count” and “the second touch challenge count”.

  FIG. 152 shows a VR revolution revolution lottery table (part 3). This VR revolution lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when it is “setting 1”, “between non-flags”, and “the number of times of touch challenge”. FIG. 153 shows a VR mid-revolution lottery table (part 4). This VR revolution lottery table (part 4) is referred to when it is “setting 1”, “between non-flags”, and “the number of touch challenge times 4”. FIG. 154 shows a VR revolution lottery table (No. 5). This VR revolution revolution lottery table (No. 5) is referred to when it is “setting 1”, “between non-flags”, and “the number of times of touch challenge”.

  FIGS. 155 to 159 show a VR revolution lottery table (No. 6) to a VR revolution revolution lottery table (No. 10). The VR revolution revolution lottery table (No. 6) to the VR revolution revolution lottery table (No. 10) is referred to in “setting 6” and “number of non-flag” “touch challenge times”.

  FIG. 160 shows the VR mid-revolution lottery table (part 11). This VR revolution lottery table (part 11) is referred to when “all settings”, “when bonus is established”, and “the number of times of touch challenge” is set. FIG. 161 shows a VR mid-revolution lottery table (No. 12). This VR revolution lottery table (No. 12) is referred to in the case of “all settings”, “when bonus is established”, and “the number of times of touch challenge”.

  FIG. 162 shows a VR mid-revolution lottery table (No. 13). This VR revolution lottery table (No. 13) is referred to when “all settings”, “when bonus is established”, and “the number of times of touch challenge is the third”. FIG. 163 shows a VR revolution lottery table (14). This VR revolution lottery table (No. 14) is referred to in the case of “all settings”, “when bonus is established”, and “the number of times of touch challenge”. FIG. 164 shows a VR mid-revolution lottery table (15). This VR revolution lottery table (No. 15) is referred to in the case of “all settings”, “when bonus is established”, and “the number of times of touch challenge”.

[ART precursor game number lottery table]
Next, the ART precursor game number lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 165 to 167.

  The ART precursor game number lottery table is referred to when the “ART precursor game number” is determined during non-ART or non-bonus. This ART precursor game number lottery table shows the correspondence between the number of precursor games and the lottery values set according to the stock ART type. Here, the “stock ART type” is the type of “ART” to be started next in the “ART” winning information stored in the sub storage area.

  In this embodiment, “D_ART” or “B_ART” is often determined as “first hit”. In this case, the “D_ART” column and the “B_ART” column in the “stock ART type” are referred to.

  The “G_ART & R_ART” column in the “stock ART type” is referred to when “D_ART” or / and “B_ART” and “G_ART” or / and “R_ART” are simultaneously won in “first hit”. At this time, “G_ART” or “R_ART” is started at the start of ART (start game or first game after the start) after the game of the number of ART precursor games is consumed.

  In the ART precursor game number lottery referring to the ART precursor game number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as a lottery result. The lottery value specified for each value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 165 shows an ART precursor game number random determination table (part 1). This ART precursor game number lottery table (part 1) is referred to when the sub game state is the “general state”. FIG. 166 shows an ART precursor game number random determination table (No. 2). This ART precursor game number lottery table (part 2) is referred to when the sub gaming state is “CZ (chance zone)”.

  FIG. 167 shows an ART precursor game number random determination table (No. 3). This ART precursor game number lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the sub game state is “general state” or “CZ (chance zone)” and “at the end of bonus”.

[ART lottery game number lottery table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 168 to 170, the ART early warning game number lottery table will be described.
The ART predictor game number lottery table is referred to when the “number of coalesced precursor games” or the “number of VR predictor games” is determined during ART. This ART sign game number lottery table shows the correspondence between the number of sign games and lottery values set in accordance with the transition to various sub game states.

  In the sign game number lottery referring to the ART sign game number lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767, random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as a lottery result. The lottery value specified for each value is sequentially subtracted. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 168 shows an ART early warning game number random determination table (part 1). This ART early warning game number lottery table (part 1) is referred to when “art start G number is determined”, “art remaining game number 11G or more (before lever operation)” or “during G_ART, R_ART”. .

  FIG. 169 shows an ART predictive game number random determination table (No. 2). This ART sign game number lottery table (part 2) is referred to when the number of remaining ART games is 7 G or more and 10 G or less (before lever operation) and “other than during G_ART and R_ART”. FIG. 170 shows an ART early warning game number random determination table (No. 3). This ART sign game number lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the “ART remaining game number is 6G or less (before lever operation)” and “except during G_ART and R_ART”.

[Title lottery table for development performance 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 171, the title lottery table for development effect 1 will be described.
The development effect 1 title lottery table is referred to when the “title” of the development effect 1 is determined.

  The development effect 1 of the present embodiment includes a game that displays the “title” of the development effect 1 on the liquid crystal display device 11 (hereinafter referred to as “title display game”), at least one game thereafter, and a maximum of six games. It is an effect performed continuously over the game. In the present embodiment, the number of games continued after the “title display game” is set as the “number of continued games”.

  That is, the case where “Development effect 1” is the shortest is the case where “Number of continuing games” is “1”. In this case, “Development effect 1” is executed over two games including “title display game” and “number of continuing games”.

  The development effect 1 title lottery table indicates a correspondence relationship between the values of “title No.” (“1” to “6”) corresponding to the title and lottery values set in accordance with various states. Note that (normal), (gorgeous), and (gorgeous firework pattern) in the development effect 1 title lottery table indicate display modes (colors and patterns) of the titles “Bocco” or “Gormu”.

  In the title lottery referring to the development effect 1 title lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as the lottery result value. It subtracts sequentially with the lottery value specified every time. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  In the development effect 1 title lottery table, “F” of “CZ precursor_F_4G” means fake. Therefore, the case of “CZ precursor_F_4G” is a case of a CZ precursor game in which CZ is not started after completion and the number of CZ precursor games is “4”. Further, “CZ precursor 4G or more” is a case where the CZ precursor game starts CZ after completion and the number of CZ precursor games is “4” or more.

  For example, if the title lottery referring to the title lottery table for development effect 1 is “CZ precursor_F_4G”, “1 (Bocco (normal))” is “28963 / It is determined with a probability of 32768. In the case of “CZ precursor 4G or more”, “1 (Bocco (normal))” is determined as the “title No.” with a probability of 27939/32768.

[Production number determination table for development effect 1]
Next, the development number 1 production number determination table will be described with reference to FIGS. 172 and 173.
The development effect 1 production number determination table is referred to when the “development production 1 production number” is determined based on the “scenario No.” determined by lottery. The production number determination table for the development effect 1 is based on the value of “scenario No.” (“1” to “93”) corresponding to the scenario content and the number of continuous games (“1” to “6”). The “production number for development effect 1” is defined.

  FIG. 172 shows an effect number determination table for development effect 1 (part 1). This development effect 1 production number determination table (part 1) is referred to when the development production 1 title is “Bocco”, and “development production” corresponding to “scenario No.” “1” to “44”. “1 production number” is defined.

  FIG. 173 shows an effect number determination table for development effect 1 (part 2). This development effect 1 production number determination table (part 2) is referred to when the development production 1 title is “Bocco”, and corresponds to “scenario No.” “45” to “93” “development production”. “1 production number” is defined.

[Direction determination table for development effect 1]
Next, with reference to FIG. 174, an effect determination table for development effect 1 will be described.
The development determination table for development effect 1 defines a correspondence relationship between “production number for development effect 1”, “production name”, and “production content”. That is, when “the production number for development effect 1” is determined, “production name” and “production content” are uniquely acquired.

  For example, when “9” is determined as the “production number for development effect 1”, “bocco-weak-win” is determined as the “production name”, and “lever ON: opposite-bocco” “1on: Weak avoidance-Bocco, 3on: Stop Bocco, 3off: Win-Bocco, Next BET: Go to WIN screen” is determined.

In the production corresponding to “Lever ON: Confrontation-Bocco”, an image of “Don-chan” as the main character confronting “Bocco” as the first character is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the start lever 16 is operated. Is displayed.
In the production corresponding to “1on: weak avoidance-Bocco”, an image avoiding the weak attack of “Bocco” by “Don-chan” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the stop button is pressed in the first stop operation. .

In an effect corresponding to “3on: Todome Bocco”, an image in which “Don-chan” makes a lasting attack on “Bocco” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the stop button is pressed in the third stop operation.
In the production corresponding to “3off: Win-Bocco”, an image of “Don-chan” winning the battle with “Bocco” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the press on the stop button in the third stop operation ends. .
In the effect corresponding to “next BET: go to WIN screen”, an image notifying the victory of “Don-chan” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 when the MAX bet button 14 or the 1BET button 15 is pressed.

[Scenario rewriting lottery table]
Next, the scenario rewriting lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS.
The scenario rewriting lottery table defines the correspondence between “scenario No.” and lottery values set according to “rewriting destination”.

  In the present embodiment, in the development effect 1, first, “title” and “scenario No.” are determined. When the start lever 16 is operated to start a game in which the development effect 1 is executed, a scenario rewriting lottery is performed in which the determined “scenario No.” is rewritten according to the sub game state and the like.

  In the scenario rewriting lottery with reference to the scenario rewriting lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is determined for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 175 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (part 1). The scenario rewriting lottery table (part 1) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G (game)”, the sub game state is “general state”, and “other”. Here, the “other” case is a case where none of the scenario rewriting lottery tables described later is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 175, when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and the sub game state is “General state” and “Other”, the “Scenario No.” is rewritten. Not performed. That is, the “development effect 1” is executed according to the “scenario No.” determined before the start lever 16 is operated.

  FIG. 176 shows the scenario rewriting lottery table (part 2). The scenario rewriting lottery table (part 2) is referred to when the continuing game of “Development effect 1” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 4G”. Here, the case of “CZ precursor 4G” is a case where the value of the CZ precursor counter is “4”. That is, when four more games (not including the current game) are consumed, “CZ (chance zone)” is started.

  As shown in FIG. 176, when the continuing game is “1G” and “CZ precursor 4G”, “scenario No.” may be rewritten. Specifically, “Bocco” with the value of “Number of continuing games” being “6” loses (successful hitting revival-failure) “Scenario No. (72 to 75)”, and the value of “Number of continuing games” is “5”. "Bocco" loses (repeated failure-failure), rewrites to "Scenario No. (68-71)".

  Accordingly, when “72” to “75” are determined as “scenario No.”, they are rewritten to “68” to “71”. As a result, the continuation game is “5G” and “Development Effect 1” ends. Further, the continuation game is “5G” and becomes “CZ precursor 0G”. That is, it is possible to match the end of “Development effect 1” with the end of “CZ precursor game”.

  If “scenario No. (72 to 75)” is not rewritten, “development effect 1” ends at the next game after the CZ precursor game ends. For this reason, the notification that the “CZ (chance zone)” starts cannot be performed at an appropriate timing.

  FIG. 177 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 3). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 3) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 3G”. FIG. 178 shows the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 4). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 4) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 2G”.

  FIG. 179 shows the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 5). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 5) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 1G”. FIG. 180 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 6). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 6) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 0G”.

  FIG. 181 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (part 7). The scenario rewriting lottery table (part 7) is referred to when the continuing game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G”. Here, the case of “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G” is a case where the value of the ART precursor counter is “6”. In other words, when the remaining 6 games (not including the current game) are digested, various “ART” are started.

  As shown in FIG. 181, when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G”, “Scenario No.” is not rewritten. That is, “Development effect 1” according to “Scenario No.” determined before operating the start lever 16 is executed.

  FIG. 182 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 8). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 5G”.

  As shown in FIG. 182, when the continuing game is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 5G”, “Scenario No.” may be rewritten. For example, “Scenario No. (“ 1 ”to“ 18 ”)” is lost when “Bocco” whose “Number of continuing games” is “1” to “5” is lost, and “6” is the value of “Number of continuing games”. To “Scenario No. (“ 51 ”to“ 54 ”)” where “Bocco” is revived.

  As a result, even if “1” to “18” are determined as “scenario No.”, it is rewritten to “51” to “54”, and the continuous game is “6G” and “Development effect 1” Ends. In addition, the continuation game is “6G” and becomes “ART precursor 0G”. That is, it is possible to match the end of “Development effect 1” with the end of “ART precursor game”.

In addition, “Development production 1” in which “Bocco losing (continuous strike revival-failure)” is displayed in the last continuous game, and “Bocco win (Bocco-revival)” is displayed in the last continuation game. It is changed to “Production 1”.
As a result, “ART” is started from the next game after the end of “Development effect 1” in which “Bocco wins (Bocco-Resurrection)” is displayed, and the start of “ART” is uncomfortable. Can not be.

  FIG. 183 shows the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 9). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 9) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 4G”. FIG. 184 shows the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 10). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 10) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 3G”.

  FIG. 185 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (part 11). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 11) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 2G”. FIG. 186 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 12). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 12) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 1G”.

  FIG. 187 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 13). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 13) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 0G”.

  FIG. 188 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 14). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 14) is referred to when the continuing game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “Main a (reel action, rare role)”. Here, in the case of “main a (reel action, rare role)”, a reel action (production using reels 3L, 3C, 3R) and a rare role (small role with a low winning probability) are determined as internal winning roles. This is the case.

  FIG. 189 shows the scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 15). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 15) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “between RB flags”. FIG. 190 shows a scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 16). The scenario rewriting lottery table (No. 16) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “1G” and “between BB flags”.

  In the present embodiment, the scenario rewriting lottery table to be referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 1” is “2G”, “3G”, “4G”, “5G” and “6G”. (Not shown) is provided.

[Title lottery table for development production 2]
Next, with reference to FIG. 191, the title lottery table for development effect 1 will be described.
The development effect 2 title lottery table is referred to when the “title” of the development effect 2 is determined.

  The development effect 2 of the present embodiment includes a game for displaying the “title” of the development effect 2 on the liquid crystal display device 11 (hereinafter referred to as “title display game”), at least one game thereafter, and a maximum of seven games. It is an effect performed continuously over the game. In the present embodiment, the number of games continued after the “title display game” is set as the “number of continued games”.

  The development effect 1 title lottery table indicates a correspondence relationship between the values of the “title No.” (“1” to “9”) corresponding to the title and lottery values set in accordance with various states. Note that (normal), (gorgeous), and (gorgeous fireworks pattern) in the title lottery table for development effect 1 indicate the display modes (colors and patterns) of the titles “Gorum”, “Bocco”, and “Norn”. .

  In the title lottery referring to the development effect 2 title lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in the present embodiment) is used as the lottery result value. It subtracts sequentially with the lottery value specified every time. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  For example, if the title lottery with reference to the development effect 2 title lottery table is “CZ Precursor_F_4G”, “1 (Golm (normal))” is 23229 as “Title No.”. / 32768 with a probability. In the case of “CZ precursor 4G or more”, “1 (Golm (Normal))” is determined as “Title No.” with a probability of 22205/32768.

[Development production 2 map lottery table]
Next, the development lottery 2 map lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 192 and 193.
The development effect 2 map lottery table is referred to when “map No.” related to “development effect 2” is determined. The development lottery 2 map lottery table includes “map No.” values (“1” to “60”) corresponding to “map contents” and lottery values set in accordance with various precursor states. The correspondence is shown.

  In the map lottery referring to the development effect 2 map lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is used as the lottery result value. It subtracts sequentially with the lottery value specified every time. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 192 shows a map lottery table for development effect 2 (part 1). FIG. 193 shows a map lottery table for development effect 2 (part 2). The development effect 2 map lottery table (part 1) and the development effect 2 map lottery table (part 2) are referred to when the “title” of the development effect 2 is “golm (normal)”.

  If the map lottery state with reference to the development effect 2 map lottery table is “CZ precursor_F_4G”, for example, “3 (weak 3G (3G in total))” as “map No.” Is determined with a probability of 9993/32768. In the case of “CZ precursor 4G or more”, “3 (weak 3G (total 3G))” is determined with a probability of 9737/32768 as “map No.”.

[Production lottery table number determination table]
Next, the effect lottery table number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect lottery table number determination table is referred to when determining the “effect lottery table number” based on the “map No.” determined by lottery. The effect lottery table number determination table is displayed according to the “map No.” value (“1” to “60”) corresponding to the map content and the number of continued games (“1” to “7”). “Lottery table number” is defined.

  The effect lottery table number determination table shown in FIG. 194 is referred to when the “title” of the development effect 2 is “Gormu”. As shown in FIG. 194, for example, when “Map No.” is “1” and the number of continuing games is “1”, “1” is determined as the “effect lottery table number”. Further, when “Map No.” is “7” and the number of continuing games is “3”, “2” is determined as “Production lottery table number”.

[Direction lottery table]
Next, the effect lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS.
The effect lottery table is referred to when the effect lottery for determining the effect number for development effect 2 is performed. The effect lottery table indicates a correspondence relationship between the value of the “production number for development effect 2” corresponding to the content of the effect and the lottery values set in accordance with various signs.

  In the effect lottery referring to the effect lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is defined for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially by lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 195 shows an effect lottery table for table number 1 (part 1). FIG. 196 shows an effect lottery table for table number 1 (No. 2). For example, when the state of various precursors is “CZ precursor 4G” (see FIG. 195), “13 (VS Golm-Gorm Small Attack-Lose)” is 4096/32768 as the “production effect number for development effect 2”. Win with a probability of.

  FIG. 197 shows an effect lottery table for table number 2 (part 1). FIG. 198 shows an effect lottery table for table number 2 (part 2). For example, when the state of various precursors is “CZ precursor 4G” (see FIG. 197), “148 (Viking Battle> VS Gormum-Gorm Small Attack-Lose-2G” is used as “Development Effect 2 Effect Number”. ) "Wins with a probability of 4096/32768.

  FIG. 199 shows an effect random determination table for table number 24 (part 1). FIG. 200 shows an effect lottery table for table number 24 (part 2). For example, when the state of various precursors is “CZ precursor 4G” (see FIG. 199), “54 (Viking Battle> Repeated Strikes-Failure)” is always won as the “Development Effect 2 Effect Number”.

[Map rewriting lottery table]
Next, the map rewriting lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 201 to 216.
The map rewriting lottery table defines the correspondence between “map No.” and lottery values set in accordance with “rewriting destination”.

  In the present embodiment, in the development effect 2, first, “Title” and “Map No.” are determined. Then, in order to start the game in the development effect 2, a map rewriting lottery is performed in which the determined “map No.” is rewritten according to various precursor states when the start lever 16 is operated.

  In the map rewriting lottery referring to the map rewriting lottery table, first, a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (0 to 32767 and random number denominator = 32768 in this embodiment) is calculated for each lottery result value. Subtract sequentially with the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the result of subtraction has become negative (whether or not a so-called “digit” has occurred). When the subtraction result becomes negative (“digit” occurs), the lottery result at that time is won.

  FIG. 201 shows a map rewriting lottery table (part 1). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 1) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G (game)”, the sub game state is “general state”, and “other”. Here, the “other” case is a case where none of the map rewriting lottery tables described later is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 201, when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and the sub game state is “General state” and “Other”, the “Map No.” is rewritten. Not performed. That is, “Development effect 2” according to “Map No.” determined before operating the start lever 16 is executed.

  FIG. 202 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 2). The map rewriting lottery table (part 2) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 4G”. Here, the case of “CZ precursor 4G” is a case where the value of the CZ precursor counter is “4”. That is, when four more games (not including the current game) are consumed, “CZ (chance zone)” is started.

  As shown in FIG. 202, when the continuous game is “1G” and “CZ precursor 4G”, “scenario No.” may be rewritten. Specifically, “Map No. (12, 18, 21, 24, 54, 56, 57, 59, 60)” having a value of “6” or “7” is set to “Continue”. The value is rewritten to “Map No. (11, 17, 20, 23, 53, 55, 58)” with the value of “number of games” being “5”.

  As a result, when “12”, “18”, “21”, “24”, “54”, “56”, “57”, “59”, “60” has been determined as “Map No.” “Map No.” is rewritten to “11”, “17”, “20”, “23”, “53”, “55”, “58”. As a result, the continuation game is “5G” and “Development Effect 1” ends. Further, the continuation game is “5G” and becomes “CZ precursor 0G”. That is, it is possible to match the end of “Development effect 1” with the end of “CZ precursor game”.

  When “12”, “18”, “21”, “24”, “54”, “56”, “57”, “59”, “60” has been determined as “Map No.” If “Map No.” is not rewritten, “Development Effect 1” ends at the next game after the CZ precursor game ends. For this reason, the notification that the “CZ (chance zone)” starts cannot be performed at an appropriate timing.

  FIG. 203 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 3). The map rewriting lottery table (part 3) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 3G”. FIG. 204 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 4). The map rewriting lottery table (part 4) is referred to when the continuing game of “Development effect 2” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 2G”.

  FIG. 205 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 5). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 5) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 1G”. FIG. 206 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 6). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 6) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G”, the sub game state is “General state”, and “CZ precursor 0G”.

  FIG. 207 shows a map rewriting lottery table (part 7). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 7) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G”. Here, the case of “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G” is a case where the value of the ART precursor counter is “6”. In other words, when the remaining 6 games (not including the current game) are digested, various “ART” are started.

  As shown in FIG. 207, when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 6G”, “Map No.” may be rewritten. For example, “1” to “24” and “49” to “60” of “Map No.” are rewritten to “48”.

  As a result, when “1” to “24” and “49” to “60” are determined as “map No.”, the map is rewritten to “48” and the number of continuing games becomes “7”. As a result, the continuation game is “7G” and “Development effect 2” ends, and “ART precursor 0G” is set. That is, it is possible to match the end of “Development effect 2” with the end of “ART precursor game”.

  FIG. 208 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 8). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 8) is referred to when the continuing game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 5G”. FIG. 209 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 9). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 9) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 4G”.

  FIG. 210 shows a map rewriting lottery table (part 10). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 10) is referred to when the continuing game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 3G”. FIG. 211 shows a map rewriting lottery table (part 11). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 11) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 2G”.

  FIG. 212 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 12). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 12) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 1G”. FIG. 213 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 13). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 13) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “D, B, G, R_ART precursor 0G”.

  FIG. 214 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 14). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 14) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “Main a (reel action, rare role)”. Here, in the case of “main a (reel action, rare role)”, a reel action (production using reels 3L, 3C, 3R) and a rare role (small role with a low winning probability) are determined as internal winning roles. This is the case.

  FIG. 215 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 15). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 15) is referred to when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “between RB flags”. FIG. 216 shows a map rewriting lottery table (No. 16). The map rewriting lottery table (No. 16) is referred to when the continuing game of “Development effect 2” is “1G” and “between BB flags”.

  In the present embodiment, reference is made when the continuous game of “Development effect 2” is “2G”, “3G”, “4G”, “5G”, “6G” and “7G” A map rewriting lottery table (not shown) is provided.

[Direction rewriting condition table]
Next, the effect rewriting condition table will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect rewriting condition table includes “end effect number for development effect 1” and “effect number for development effect 2” and the end of the development effect set according to the value of the lottery flag K (“0” to “4”). Stipulated in the correspondence relationship.

  The “○” mark in the effect rewriting condition table indicates “development effect 1” in which the corresponding “development effect 1 effect number” or “development effect 2 effect number” in which “development effect 2” is determined Indicates end.

  “Don-chan”, the main character, is revived in the productions corresponding to “18” of “production number for development effect 1” and “54”, “55”, “25” of “production number for development effect 2”. It is directing. In the game before “Don-chan” is revived, the result of the battle (win / loss) is once derived (displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11).

  In other words, in the game before “Don-chan” revives, it appears that the battle (development effect) will end, so the development effect is contrary to the originally determined “scenario No.” or “map No.” effect. The player does not feel uncomfortable even after ending. This is because it is not possible for the player to determine whether the development effect has not been revived from the beginning, or whether it was a development effect that was scheduled to be revived but ended forcibly.

  In an effect corresponding to “54” of “effect number for development effect 2”, “Don-chan” is revived, but a display notifying the loss (failure) is performed. That is, the effect corresponding to “54” of the “effect number for development effect 2” is merely an effect that is additionally performed to give a sense of expectation, and is not necessarily required.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when it is a time when there is no problem even if the development effect (continuous effect) is forcibly ended, for example, a rare role with a high expectation level where “ART” or “bonus” is won is won. Then, the development effect (continuous effect) that was scheduled to be executed is canceled. Then, the effect when the development effect is not performed is determined by lottery and executed.

  In addition, when it is a time when there is no problem even if the development effect (continuous effect) is forcibly ended, if a reel action or freeze (game lock) or the like that does not match the execution time in the normal effect occurs, it is executed. Cancel the planned development (continuous production). Then, the effect when the development effect is not performed is determined by lottery and executed.

  For the effects corresponding to “18” of “Development effect 1 effect number” and “55” and “25” of “Development effect 2 effect number”, “Don-chan” is revived and the winning (success) is notified. Display. The display for notifying the winner (success) is an announcement of “ART” winning (may be a bonus winning).

  Therefore, if the development effect (continuous effect) is forcibly terminated, the winning of “ART” will not be notified, so the stage of starting “ART” after the winning of “ART” is announced. It becomes impossible to step on. As a result, there is a possibility that the gameability may be unclear, or that the effect of expectation will not be meaningful.

  As described above, the effects corresponding to “18” of “Development effect 1 effect number” and “55” and “25” of “Development effect 2 effect number” are “54. Unlike the production corresponding to “”, it is not preferable to forcibly end the production. However, if a freeze (game lock) occurs, the winning of “ART” is confirmed. The freeze itself corresponds to the “ART” winning announcement.

  Therefore, the development effect (continuous effect) is forcibly terminated only when a freeze occurs (that is, when the winning of “ART” is confirmed and the player can recognize that fact). Then, an effect based on “freeze” is determined by lottery and executed.

<Configuration of storage area provided in sub-RAM>
[Sub storage area]
Next, the configuration of the sub storage area provided in the sub RAM 83 will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, although description is omitted here (not shown), various data such as a storage area for registering the above-described effect content and effect number, and an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 41 (see FIG. 4). A storage area for storing.

  The sub storage area includes “ART stock area A”, “ART stock area B”, “G_ART stock area”, and “rocket flag storage area”. “ART stock area A” indicates a specific example of the notification storage area according to the present invention, and “ART stock area B” indicates a specific example of the non-notification storage area according to the present invention.

In “ART stock area A”, winning information of “D_ART” or “B_ART” scheduled to be displayed (notified) is stored. In this “ART stock area A”, 256 pieces of winning information can be stored. In addition, in “ART stock area B”, winning information of “D_ART” or “B_ART” scheduled to hide (not notify) the winning is stored. In this “ART stock area B”, 256 pieces of winning information can be stored.

  “ART” winning information stored in “ART stock area A” or “ART stock area B” includes “ART” identification data (“0” to “2”) and identification data for the table number of the stock trigger. ("0" to "9"). When the winning “ART” is “B_ART”, the identification data of “ART” becomes “1”, and when the winning “ART” is “D_ART”, the identification data of “ART” becomes “2”. Become. The table number of the stock opportunity is determined with reference to the aforementioned various table number determination tables (see FIGS. 91, 97, 122, 131, 138, and 141).

  In the present embodiment, it is executed preferentially from “ART” corresponding to the winning information of “ART” stored in “ART stock area A”. When all the “ART” corresponding to the “ART” winning information stored in the “ART stock area A” is executed, the “ART” winning information stored in the “ART stock area B” is handled. It is executed in the order in which “ART” is stored.

  That is, in the present embodiment, “ART” informed of winning is preferentially executed, and thereafter “ART” not informed of winning is executed. As a result, it is possible to make it impossible to easily guess the timing and trigger when the winning of “ART” for which the winning is not notified is determined.

  In addition, after all “ART” s that have been notified of winning are executed, the player has a sense of expectation whether or not “ART” will be executed next every time “ART” ends. And can increase the interest of the game.

  In “G_stock area”, winning information of “G_ART” is stored. In this “G_ART stock area”, 64 pieces of winning information can be stored. The winning information of “G_ART” includes stock trigger table number identification data (“0” to “9”) and stock ART mode (“0” to “3”). When “R_ART” is won, “1” is stored in the “rocket flag storage area”.

  In addition, the sub storage area has “VR stock counter”, “continuation stock counter”, “CZ precursor counter”, “ART precursor counter”, “union precursor counter”, “rocket precursor counter” and “VR precursor counter”. doing.

  The “VR stock counter” is incremented by “1” every time the VR is won, and is decremented by “1” when “VR (Viking Rush)” is started. The value of the “continuous stock counter” is incremented by “1” every time the continuous stock is won during “D_ART”, and is decremented by “1” every time “D_ART” is continued.

  The “CZ precursor game number” is set in the “CZ precursor game counter”, and the value of the “CZ precursor game counter” is decremented by “1” each time the CZ precursor game is consumed. The “ART predictor counter” is set with “ART predictor number”, and the value of the “ART predictor counter” is decremented by “1” every time the ART predictor game is consumed once.

  In the “union omen counter”, the “number of union omen games” is set, and the value of the “union omen counter” is decremented by “1” every time the union omen game is consumed. In the “rocket precursor counter”, “number of rocket precursor games” is set, and the value of the “rocket precursor counter” is decremented by “1” every time the rocket precursor game is consumed once. In the “VR precursor counter”, “the number of VR precursor games” is set, and the value of the “VR precursor counter” is decremented by “1” every time the VR precursor game is consumed once.

  Further, the sub storage area has an “ART mode storage area”, a “loop mode storage area”, a “merging mode storage area”, a “next latent management flag storage area”, and an “ART identification data storage area”.

  The “ART mode” is provided in “B_ART” and “D_ART”, and is a mode related to lottery (winning probability) of “G_ART”. The “loop mode” is a mode related to lottery (winning probability) of continuous stock in “D_ART”. The “merging mode” is a mode related to an ART lottery (winning probability) in “G_ART”.

  The “next latent control flag” is a flag indicating whether or not a precursor game is played between “ART”. “ART identification data” is data for identifying “B_ART” and “D_ART”. When the currently activated “ART” is “B_ART”, “ART identification data” is “1”, and when it is “D_ART”, “ART identification data” is “2”.

  The sub storage area includes an “ART game number counter”, a “combination game number counter”, a “combination identification data storage area”, a “rocket identification data storage area”, and a “VR identification data storage area”.

  The “ART game number counter” is provided for managing the number of remaining games of “B_ART” and “D_ART”. In this “ART game number counter”, “ART start G number” is set. The “merged game number counter” is provided for managing the number of remaining games of “G_ART”. For example, a “number of combined games” is set in the “number of combined games” counter.

  The “union identification data” is data for identifying “G_ART”. When the currently activated “ART” is “G_ART”, the value of the “union identification data” is “1”. . “Rocket identification data” is data for identifying “R_ART”. When “ART” currently activated is “R_ART”, the value of “rocket identification data” is “1”. . “VR identification data” is data for identifying “VR”. When “VR (Viking Rush)” is activated, the value of “VR identification data” is “1”.

  The sub storage areas are “touch operation identification data storage area”, “VR revolution flag storage area”, “CZ game number counter”, “CZ identification data storage area”, “touch-compatible data storage area” and “VR”. A medium correct / incorrect identification data storage area ”.

  The “touch operation identification data” is data for identifying a touch operation on the character decoration portions 22L and 22R. When a touch operation is performed on the character decoration unit 22L, the value of “touch operation identification data” is “1”. When a touch operation is performed on the character decoration unit 22R, the value of “touch operation identification data” is “2”.

  The “VR revolution flag storage area” is a flag for managing whether or not “revolution activation” has been won. When “revolution activation” is won, “1” is stored in the “VR revolution flag storage area”. The “CZ game number counter” is provided for managing the number of remaining games of “CZ (chance zone)”. In this “CZ game number counter”, “CZ game number” is set.

  “CZ identification data” is data for managing whether or not “CZ (chance zone)” is in place, and when “CZ (chance zone)” is in place, the value of “CZ identification data” is It becomes “1”. “Touch corresponding data” is data for identifying a correct / incorrect answer in “VR”. For example, when the touch on the character decoration portion 22R (right) is correct and there is no touch on the character decoration portions 22L and 22R, the value of “touch correspondence data” is “0”. “VR correct / incorrect identification data” is data for identifying correct / incorrect of five touch challenges in “VR”.

[Table number and correspondence table]
Next, with reference to FIG. 219, the correspondence between table numbers and various states will be described.
FIG. 219 shows a correspondence table between table numbers and various states.

  For example, when the value of “table number” is “0”, “general state” or “CZ (chance zone)” is indicated. Therefore, if “0” is stored as the value of “table number” in various ART stock areas, it means that “ART” is won in “general state” or “CZ (chance zone)”.

[Correspondence table between loop mode data and loop mode]
Next, a correspondence relationship between loop mode data and loop modes will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 220 is a correspondence table between loop mode data and loop modes, and shows various loop modes corresponding to the loop mode data.

  For example, when the value of “loop mode data” is “1”, “loop mode 1” is set. When “Loop Mode 1” is set in “D_ART”, 33% of the result of the continuous stock lottery performed every game until the game (game) related to one set of “D_ART” is consumed. Win the continuation stock with probability.

<Description of main control circuit operation>
Next, contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 51 of the main control circuit 41 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS.

[Main operation processing of pachislot by control of main CPU]
First, the procedure of main operation processing of the pachislot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 51 will be described with reference to a main flowchart shown in FIG.

  First, when the power is turned on to the pachislot machine 1, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process when the power is turned on (S1). In this initialization process, it is determined whether the backup has been normally performed, whether the setting has been changed appropriately, and the like, and initialization corresponding to the determination result is performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of one game (S2). In this initialization process, the data in the designated storage area in the main RAM 53 is cleared. Note that the designated storage area here is a storage area that needs to be erased for each game, such as an internal winning combination storage area or a display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S3). In this processing, input checks of the medal sensor 35S and the start switch 16S are performed. Details of the medal acceptance / start check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 222 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 extracts random values (0 to 65535) and stores the extracted random values in a random value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 53 (S4). Next, the main CPU 51 extracts an effect random number value used in the reel effect and lock control in the “continuous lock state”, and uses the extracted effect random number value in the effect random value storage area (not stored) provided in the main RAM 53. (S5). In the present embodiment, the production random number value is extracted from the range of 0 to 32767.

  When the extracted various random number values are stored in a predetermined random value storage area, the main CPU 51 performs an internal lottery process (S6). In this process, the internal winning combination is determined by lottery based on the random value extracted in S4. Details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game lock lottery process (S7). The details of the game lock lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs reel stop initial setting processing (S8). Details of the reel stop initial setting process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a start command transmission process (S9). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a start command to the sub control circuit 42. Note that the start command includes a parameter for specifying an internal winning combination.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game start lock process (S10). In this process, the reel effect and lock at the start of the game corresponding to the type of reel effect and lock performed in the “continuous lock state” determined in the process of S8 are mainly performed. The details of the game start lock process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a wait process (S11). In this process, when the predetermined time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has not elapsed since the start of the previous game, the main CPU 51 digests the waiting time until the predetermined time elapses.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel rotation start process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 51 requests the start of rotation of all reels. When the start of rotation of all reels is requested, driving of the three stepping motors 61L, 61C, and 61R is controlled by an interrupt process (see FIG. 135) described later that is executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Then, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R is started. At this time, each reel is subjected to acceleration control until the rotation speed reaches a constant speed, and then controlled so as to maintain the constant speed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S13). In this process, the main CPU 51 acquires the pull-in priority data and stores it in the pull-in priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop control process (S14). In this process, the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped based on the timing when the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are respectively pressed and the internal winning combination. Details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a winning search process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 51 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (after symbol code storage area 2 in FIG. 50) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 48). In this process, the combination of symbols displayed on the effective line (winning determination line) after all of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R are stopped, and a symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 11), Is matched. Then, the main CPU 51 may determine whether or not the display combination is displayed on the active line, and store the determination result in the display combination storage area.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs medal payout processing (S16). In this process, the hopper 33 is driven and the number of credits is updated based on the payout number of the display combination determined in S15, and medals are paid out. At this time, in this embodiment, as shown in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 11), the number of inserted medals is one or three, and the number of medals paid out varies depending on the display combination. The maximum payout number (payout upper limit) is 15.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs RT control processing (S17). In this process, the main CPU 51 manages the RT gaming state. Details of the RT control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 238 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a game end effect control process (S18). In this process, the output of the jackpot signal is controlled according to a predetermined condition. Details of the game end effect control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 239 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a payout end command transmission process (S19). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a payout end command to the sub control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end check process (S20). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to various counters for managing the end timing of the bonus game and checks whether or not the operation of the bonus game is to end. The details of the bonus end check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 240 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus operation check process (S21). In this process, the main CPU 51 checks whether or not to start the operation of the bonus game and whether or not to replay. Details of the bonus operation check process will be described later with reference to FIG. When the bonus operation check process ends, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S2, and repeats the processes after S2.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 222, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S3 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not there is an automatic insertion request (S31). The presence / absence of the automatic insertion request is determined by determining whether or not the automatic insertion counter is “0”. That is, the main CPU 51 determines that there is no automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “0”, and determines that there is an automatic input request when the automatic input counter is “1” or more.

  The automatic insertion counter is data for identifying whether or not a display combination related to re-playing has been established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the medals for the number of coins inserted in the previous unit game are automatically inserted into the automatic insertion counter.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S31 that there is an automatic loading request (when S31 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs an automatic loading process (S32). In this process, the value of the automatic insertion counter is copied to the insertion number counter, and then the value of the automatic insertion counter is cleared. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S31 that there is no automatic insertion request (when S31 is NO), the main CPU 51 permits medal acceptance (S33). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is driven, and medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 13 are accepted. The received medals are counted and guided to the hopper 33.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the maximum number of inserted sheets according to the gaming state (S34). Specifically, in the BB3 (RB3) game state, the maximum value of the inserted number is set to “1”, and in the other game states (BB1, BB2 game state and general game state), the maximum value of the inserted number is set to “3”. To "".

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the medal acceptance is permitted (S35). In S35, when the main CPU 51 determines that the medal acceptance is not permitted (when S35 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S39 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S35 that the medal acceptance is permitted (S35 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal insertion check process (S36). In this process, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a medal is inserted, and adds “1” to the inserted number counter when a medal is inserted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 transmits a medal insertion command to the sub control circuit 42 (S37). The medal insertion command includes a parameter for specifying the number of inserted coins.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the inserted number is a game start possible number (S38). In S38, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inserted number is not the game start possible number (when S38 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35. On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S38 that the inserted number is the game start possible number (when S38 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S39 described later. In this embodiment, the number of games that can be started in the BB3 (RB3) gaming state is “1”, and the number of games that can be started in other gaming states (BB1, BB2 gaming state and general gaming state) is “3”. Yes (see FIG. 14).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the start switch is on (S39). When the main CPU 51 determines in S39 that the start switch is not on (when S39 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S35 and repeats the processes after S35.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S39 that the start switch is on (when S39 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S40). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 35 (see FIG. 3) is not driven, and the inserted medal is discharged from the medal payout opening 18. When this process ends, the main CPU 51 ends the medal acceptance / start check process, and moves the process to S4 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 223, the internal lottery process performed in S6 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described. In the present embodiment, internal lottery processing using various internal lottery tables described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. That is, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for executing internal lottery processing (internal winning combination determining means).

  First, the main CPU 51 sets an internal lottery table corresponding to the gaming state (S41). That is, the main CPU 51 grasps the current gaming state with reference to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 47), and determines the type and number of lottery of the internal lottery table based on the internal lottery table determination table (see FIG. 14). decide. The number of lotteries indicates the number of times of lottery value subtraction and determination of whether or not a digit has occurred for each winning number defined by the internal lottery table.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs lottery value change processing (S42). In this process, the lottery value of the winning number related to the re-game is changed according to the game state. The details of the lottery value changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a random value stored in the random value storage area (S43). Then, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as the initial value of the winning number.

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a lottery value corresponding to the winning number with reference to the internal lottery table, and subtracts the lottery value from the random number value (S44).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the calculation result in S44 is less than 0 (negative value) (S45).

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S45 that the calculation result is not less than 0 (when S45 is NO), the main CPU 51 updates the random number value and the winning number (S46). Specifically, the value of the calculation result is set to a random value, and the winning number is incremented by one.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not all winning numbers have been checked (S47). When it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 51 has not checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S44 and repeats the processes after S44.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S47 that the main CPU 51 has checked all the winning numbers (when S47 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the data pointer (S48). That is, the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the small role / replay data pointer and the bonus data pointer.

  Here, returning to the description of the processing of S45 again, when the main CPU 51 determines in S45 that the calculation result is less than 0 (negative value) (when S45 is YES), the main CPU 51 According to the winning number, a small role / replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are acquired (S49).

  After the processing of S48 or S49, the main CPU 51 refers to the small winning combination / replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIGS. 24 to 28), and acquires the internal winning combination based on the small winning combination / replay data pointer. (S50).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the internal winning combination storing area (S51).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S52). In S52, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S52 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S57 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S52 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (when S52 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the internal winning combination determination table for bonus ( Referring to FIG. 23), an internal winning combination is acquired based on the bonus data pointer (S53).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired internal winning combination in the carryover combination storing area (S54).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not any of bits 0 to 2 of the carryover combination storage area 1 is “1” (S55). In S55, when the main CPU 51 determines that any of bits 0 to 2 in the carryover combination storage area 1 is not "1" (when S55 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S57 described later. .

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S55 that any of the bits 0 to 2 in the carryover combination storage area 1 is “1” (when S55 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the RT3 gaming state flag. The game state flag storage area is updated by setting (S56). Specifically, “1” is stored (set) in bit 3 of the game state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 47).

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the carryover combination storing area (S57). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the internal lottery process, and moves the process to S7 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Lottery value change processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the lottery value changing process performed in S42 in the flowchart of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 223) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 47) to determine whether or not the RT gaming state flag is on (S61). Specifically, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “1” is set in any of the bits 0 to 3 in the gaming state flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 47). In S61, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state flag is not on (when S61 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value changing process, and the process is an internal lottery process (see FIG. 223). ) To S43.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S61 that the RT gaming state flag is on (when S61 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines that the RT internal lottery table corresponding to the RT gaming state that is on. , The lottery value of the winning number (“33” to “41”) related to the re-game in the internal lottery table for the general gaming state (see FIG. 16) is changed (S62). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the lottery value changing process, and moves the process to S43 of the internal lottery process (see FIG. 102).

[Game lock lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 225, the game lock lottery process performed in S7 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (S71). In S71, when the main CPU 51 determines that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is not “00000000” (when S71 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S73 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S71 that the data stored in the carryover combination storage area is “00000000” (when S71 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is a bonus winning game. Is discriminated (S72). Here, the bonus winning game is a game in which the bonus is won in a state where the bonus is not carried over.

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S72 that the game is not a bonus winning game (when S72 is NO), the main CPU 51 sets a game lock flag corresponding to the winning game lock and a value corresponding to the winning game lock. Set to the lock timer. Then, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S72 that the main CPU 51 is a bonus winning game (when S72 is YES), or when S71 is NO, the main CPU 51 is in the RT2 gaming state and the winning number is “33”. Is determined (S73). In S73, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT2 gaming state and the winning number is “33” (when S73 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the game lock lottery table A (see FIG. 40). Then, based on the production random number 1, game lock lottery is performed (S74).

  If the game lock (“9”) is won in S74, the game lock flag corresponding to the won game lock and the value corresponding to the won game lock are set in the lock timer. Then, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

  That is, the game lock lottery with reference to the game lock lottery table A (see FIG. 40) is performed when the RT2 gaming state and the winning number is “33”. Therefore, the game lock (“9”) is won in the RT2 gaming state, that is, when “ART” is being executed.

  In S73, when the main CPU 51 determines that the gaming state is RT2 and the winning number is not "33" (when S73 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning number is "8". A determination is made (S75). In S75, when it is determined that the winning number is not “8” (when S75 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S78 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S75 that the winning number is “8” (in the case where S75 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the game lock lottery table B (see FIG. 41) and performs the effect. Based on the random value 1, a game lock lottery is performed (S76). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not any game lock (“1” to “4”) has been won in the game lock lottery with reference to the game lock lottery table B (see FIG. 41) (S77). .

  When the main CPU 51 determines in S77 that any game lock has been won (if S77 is YES), the main CPU 51 corresponds to the game lock flag corresponding to the winning game lock and the winning game lock. Set the value to be set to the lock timer. Then, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S77 that the game lock is not won (when S77 is NO), or when S75 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines that the winning number is “0”. It is determined whether or not (S78). When the main CPU 51 determines that the winning number is not “8” in S78 (when S78 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S80 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the winning number is “0” in S78 (when S78 is YES), the main CPU 51 calculates a value obtained by multiplying the effect random number 1 and the effect random number 2. The effect random number value 1 is stored in the main RAM 53 (S79). As a result, the random number denominator becomes 65536 squared only when the winning number is “0 (lost)”.

  After S79 or when S78 is NO, the main CPU 51 refers to the game lock lottery table C (see FIG. 42) and performs game lock lottery based on the random number value 1 for performance (S80). In S80, when any game lock ("4" to "8") is won, a game lock flag corresponding to the won game lock and a value corresponding to the won game lock are set in the lock timer. Then, the main CPU 51 ends the game lock lottery process, and moves the process to S8 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

In the present embodiment, a value obtained by multiplying the production random number 1 and the production random value 2 is used as the production random value 1, and used in the game lock lottery referring to the game lock lottery table B (see FIG. 41). The production random number value 1 is used again. However, by providing a production random number 3,
In the game lock lottery referring to the game lock lottery table C according to the present invention, a value obtained by multiplying the production random number 2 and the production random value 3 may be used.

[Reel stop initial setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 226, the reel stop initial setting process performed in S8 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the spinning cylinder stop number selection table (see FIG. 31), and acquires the spinning cylinder stop number based on the internal winning combination acquired in the internal lottery process of S6 in FIG. (S101).

  Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 32), and acquires various information corresponding to the rotation stop number based on the acquired rotation stop number (S102). Specifically, the main CPU 51, corresponding to the acquired rotation stop number, pull-in priority table selection table number, pull-in priority table number, forward push table selection data, forward push table change data, forward push Time table change initial data and irregular pressing time table selection data are acquired.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the rotating identifier “0FFH (11111111B)” in the entire symbol code storage area (see FIG. 50) (S103).

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores “3” in the stop button non-operating counter provided in the main RAM 53 (S104). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop initial setting process, and moves the process to S9 of the main flow (see FIG. 221). The stop button non-operating counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons whose stop operation has not been detected.

[Lock process at game start]
Next, with reference to FIG. 227, the game start time locking process performed in S10 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets a reel effect pattern according to the game lock flag (S111). As the reel effect pattern, as described above, first to fifth reel effects are set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the lock timer is “0” (S112). When the main CPU 51 determines in S112 that the value of the lock timer is not “0” (when S112 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S112 until the value of the lock timer becomes “0”. stand by.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S112 that the value of the lock timer is “0” (when S112 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the game start lock process, and the process proceeds to the main flow ( The process proceeds to S11 in FIG.

[Retrieve priority storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 228, a description will be given of the pull-in priority storage process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 221).

  First, the main CPU 51 stores the stop button non-operating counter in the main RAM 53 as the number of searches (S121). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a search target reel determination process (S122). In this process, for example, the main CPU 51 selects a predetermined reel from the rotating reels and determines the selected reel as a search target reel.

  For example, in S122, when all (three) reels are rotated, the left reel 3L is first determined as a search target reel. Thereafter, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the left reel 3L. When the process returns to S122 again, the middle reel 3C is determined as a search target reel. Then, various processes up to S131 described later are performed on the middle reel 3C, and when returning to S122 again, the right reel 3R is next determined as a search target reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S123). In this process, the pull-in priority table is selected based on the internal winning combination (the small combination / replay data pointer) and the operation stop button. Details of the pull-in priority table selection process will be described later with reference to FIG. 229 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” as the symbol position data and sets “21” as the symbol check count (S124). Then, the main CPU 51 performs a symbol code acquisition process (S125). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the current symbol position data located on the effective line (winning determination line) of the search target reel is stored in the symbol code storage area. At this time, symbol codes for the number of valid lines are stored. The details of the symbol code acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 230 described later.

  Next, the main CPU 51 updates the display combination storing area (see FIG. 46) based on the acquired symbol code and the data in the symbol code storing area (see FIG. 50) (S126). At this time, regardless of whether the internal winning combination is won or not, a combination of symbols that can be displayed (a displayable combination) is stored in the display combination storing area based on the stopped symbol.

  In this embodiment, the symbol code storage area information (symbol code and displayable role corresponding thereto) is updated for each reel to be stopped. At this time, the displayable combination may be obtained from data prepared in advance that defines the correspondence between the stopped reel symbol and the corresponding displayable combination, or the stopped reel symbol. And the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 7 to 11) may be obtained by collating them. When the former method is used, the correspondence relationship between the symbol and the displayable combination changes for each reel.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S127). In this process, the main CPU 51 draws priority for the combination whose bit is “1” in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 46) and whose bit is “1” in the internal winning combination storage area. With reference to the ranking table (see FIG. 38), pull-in priority data is acquired.

  In addition, when a symbol of a winning combination (for example, a winning symbol related to “Cherry”: see FIG. 9) is displayed on some reels, in the reel that is “ANY”, the drawing priority order of the winning symbol Do not get data. Further, if there is a possibility that a winning combination that has not been won is confirmed in the reel for which winning is confirmed, the drawing priority data is set to “stop prohibited (all bits 0)”.

  Next, the main CPU 51 stores the acquired pull-in priority data in the pull-in priority data storage area (see FIG. 51) (S128). At this time, the pull-in priority data is stored in the pull-in priority data storage area so that each priority value corresponds to a bit in the storage area. Next, the main CPU 51 adds 1 to the symbol position data and subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S129).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130). In S130, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of symbol checks is not 0 (when S130 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S125 and repeats the processes after S125.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S130 that the number of symbol checks is 0 (S130 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of searches has been searched (S131).

  In S131, when it is determined that the main CPU 51 has not searched the number of times of search (when S131 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S122 and repeats the processes after S122. On the other hand, when it is determined in S131 that the main CPU 51 has searched as many times as the number of searches (when S131 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority storage process, and the process proceeds to S14 of the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to.

[Pull-in priority table selection processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 229, a description will be given of the attraction priority table selection process performed at S123 in the attraction priority order storage process flowchart (see FIG. 228).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the drawing priority table number is set, that is, whether or not the drawing priority table number is stored directly in the reel stop initial setting process (S8) (S141). ). When the main CPU 51 determines in S141 that the pull-in priority table number has been set (if YES in S141), the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority table selection process and stores the pull-in priority order. The process proceeds to S124 of the process (see FIG. 228).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority table number is not set in S141 (when S141 is NO), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 49) and the operation stop button. Referring to the area (see FIG. 48), the corresponding drawing priority table number is set (S142). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the pull-in priority order table selection process, and moves the process to S124 in the pull-in priority order storing process (see FIG. 228).

  In S142, first, the main CPU 51 refers to the pressing order storage area and the operation stop button storage area, and acquires the data of the pressing order and the operation stop button. Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the drawing priority table selection table corresponding to the drawing priority table selection data, and acquires the drawing priority table number based on the pressing order and the operation stop button. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 sets the acquired pull-in priority table number.

[Design code acquisition processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 230, the symbol code acquisition processing performed in S125 in the flowchart (see FIG. 228) of the drawing priority order storage processing will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets valid line data (S151). In this embodiment, the effective line (winning determination line) is provided with one line (center line) as described above. Next, the main CPU 51 sets the symbol position data for checking the search target reel based on the search symbol position and the effective line data (S152). For example, when the search target reel is the left reel 3L, since it is desired to acquire information on the middle stage of the search target reel, the check symbol position data indicating the middle stage is set.

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains a symbol code of the symbol position data for checking (S153). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the symbol code storing process, and moves the process to S126 of the pull-in priority storing process (see FIG. 228).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, the reel stop control process performed in S13 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the reel stop control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 41. In other words, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 41 also serves as means for executing reel stop control processing (stop control means).

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S161). In S161, when the main CPU 51 determines that the effective stop button is not pressed (when S161 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S161 and the effective stop button is pressed. Wait until.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S161 that a valid stop button has been pressed (in the case where S161 is YES), the main CPU 51 stores the pressing order storage area (see FIG. 49) and the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 48) is updated (S162). Next, the main CPU 51 decrements the stop button non-operating counter by 1 (S163).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a search target reel from the operation stop button (S164). Then, the main CPU 51 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 53 based on the symbol counter (S165).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding piece number determination process (S166). The details of the sliding piece number determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub-control circuit 42 (S167). The reel stop command transmitted in this process includes information such as the type of reel to be stopped, the number of sliding pieces, and the ON / OFF edge of the stop switch. Note that the ON / OFF edge information of the stop switch may be monitored by an interrupt process described later, and the information may be transmitted to the sub control circuit 42.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines a planned stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S166, and stores the determined planned stop position in the main RAM 53 (S168). In this process, the main CPU 51 adds the number of sliding frames to the stop start position, and sets the result as the planned stop position.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the planned stop position determined in S168 as a search symbol position (S169). Next, the main CPU 51 performs the symbol code acquisition process described with reference to FIG. 230 (S170). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 50) using the acquired symbol code (S171).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a control change process (S172). Details of the control change process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pressed stop button has been released (S173). In S173, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressed stop button is not released (when S173 is NO), the main CPU 51 repeats the process of S173 and waits until the pressed stop button is released. To do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S173 that the pressed stop button has been released (YES in S173), the main CPU 51 performs a reel stop command transmission process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a reel stop command to the sub control circuit 42. At this time, the data structure of the reel stop command to be transmitted is the same as that of the reel stop command transmitted in S167. However, the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S174 is different from the ON edge / OFF edge information included in the reel stop command transmitted in S167.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the stop button non-operation counter is “0” (S175). In S175, when the main CPU 51 determines that the inoperative counter is not “0” (when S175 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 228 (S176). ). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 returns the process to S161 and repeats the processes after S161.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S175 that the inoperative counter is “0” (when S175 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the reel stop control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 221). (Refer to S14).

[Sliding piece number determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 232, the slip piece number determination process performed in S166 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 selects line mask data corresponding to the operation stop button based on a line mask data table (not shown) (S181). In this process, for example, when the left stop button 17L is pressed, the main CPU 51 sets “10000000” in which the bit 7 corresponding to the “left reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. Select. For example, when the middle stop button 17C is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects “00010000” in which bit 4 corresponding to “middle reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. To do. Further, for example, when the right stop button 17R is pressed, the main CPU 51 selects “00000010” in which bit 1 corresponding to “right reel A line” of the stop data is set as line mask data. To do.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is the first stop (the stop button non-operation counter is “2”) (S182). In S182, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not the first stop (when S182 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the second and third stop processing (S183). The details of the second and third stop processes will be described later with reference to FIG. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs processing of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S182 that the main CPU 51 is the first stop (when S182 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button is a left stop button (S184).

  In S184, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button is the left stop button (when S184 is YES), the main CPU 51 acquires the table selection data and the symbol counter at the time of forward pressing (S185). In this process, the forward selection table selection data is obtained with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 32). Next, the main CPU 51 refers to the first stop table for forward pressing corresponding to the table selection data for forward pressing, and acquires the number-of-slip determination data and the change status based on the symbol counter (S186). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 performs processing of S191 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S184 that the operation stop button is not the left stop button (when S184 is NO), the main CPU 51 obtains the irregular pressing table selection data and selects the irregular pressing table selection. An irregular pressing stop table corresponding to the data is set (S187). In this process, the irregular pressing time table selection data is acquired with reference to the reel stop initial setting table (see FIG. 32).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S188). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the main CPU 51 performs line mask data change processing (S189). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 235 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 refers to the set irregular stop table when it is pressed, and acquires the number of pieces of sliding piece determination based on the line mask data and the stop start position (S190).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a priority pull-in control process (S191). In this process, the drawing priority order data corresponding to each symbol position in the range from the stop start position to the maximum number of sliding symbols “4” is compared, and the most appropriate number of sliding symbols is determined. Details of the priority pull-in control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 236 described later. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the sliding piece number determination process, and moves the process to S167 in the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231).

[Second and third stop processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the second and third stop processing performed in S183 in the flowchart (see FIG. 232) of the sliding piece number determination processing will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is during the second stop operation (S201). In S201, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not during the second stop operation (when S201 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S201 that the main CPU 51 is at the time of the second stop operation (when S201 is YES), the main CPU 51 pushes the stop buttons in the order of pressing (the first stop is the left reel 3L). It is determined whether or not (S202). In S202, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not a forward press (when S202 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S204 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S202 that the main CPU 51 is a forward press (when S202 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a line change bit check process (S203). Details of the line change bit check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a line mask data change process (S204). Details of the line mask data changing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 235 described later. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a sliding frame number search process (S205). In this process, with reference to the stop table (FIGS. 33, 35, and 36), the slip piece number determination data is determined based on the stop start position.

  For example, when the line mask data is “00010000” corresponding to “middle reel A line”, the main CPU 51 refers to the column of “middle reel A line” of bit 4. Then, a search is sequentially performed as to whether or not the corresponding data is “1” for each symbol position within the range of the maximum number of sliding symbols from the stop start position. Next, the main CPU 51 calculates the difference from the symbol position where the corresponding data is “1” to the stop start position, and determines the calculated value as the number of sliding pieces determination data. Then, after the processing of S205, the main CPU 51 ends the second and third stop processing, and moves the processing to S191 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 232).

[Line change bit check processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 234, the line change bit to be performed in S188 in the flowchart (see FIG. 232) of the sliding piece number determining process and in S203 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 233). The check process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change status is “1” or “2” (S211). In S211, when the main CPU 51 determines that the change status is “1” or “2” (when S211 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding line status (S212). In this process, in this embodiment, when the change status is “1”, the A line status is set, and when the change status is “2”, the B line status is set. After the process of S212, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check process, and the process is S189 of the slip piece number determination process (see FIG. 1232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 233). ) In S204.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S211 that the change status is not "1" or "2" (when S211 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the line change bit is on. (S213). In this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the column corresponding to “middle reel line change bit” or “right reel line change bit” in the stop table (see FIGS. 35 and 36), and the data corresponding to the stop start position is stored. It is determined whether or not “1”. When the main CPU 51 determines that the data corresponding to the stop start position is not “1”, that is, the line change bit is not on (when S213 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the line change bit check process. , And the process proceeds to S189 in the sliding piece number determination process (see FIG. 232) or S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 233).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S213 that the data corresponding to the stop start position is “1”, that is, the line change bit is ON (when S213 is YES), the main CPU 51 The line status is set (S214). The B line status is data used for changing the line mask data. After the process of S214, the main CPU 51 ends the line change bit check process, and the process is S189 of the slip piece number determination process (see FIG. 232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 233). ) In S204.

[Line mask data change processing]
Next, referring to FIG. 235, the line mask data to be performed in S189 in the flowchart (see FIG. 232) of the sliding piece number determining process and in S204 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processes (see FIG. 233). The change process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the C line status is set (S221). Note that the setting of the C line status is performed in the case of a forward press in a second post-stop control change process (see FIG. 238) described later.

  In S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line status is set (when S221 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button. A determination is made (S222).

  In S222, when the main CPU 51 determines that the operation stop button at the second stop is the middle stop button (when S222 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the right twice (S223). ). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is a middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop is a right stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00000010” to “10000000” by the process of S223. As a result, the column of bit 7 corresponding to the “right reel C line data” of the stop table for second and third stops (see FIG. 35) at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S223, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 233). ) In S205.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S222 that the operation stop button at the time of the second stop is not the middle stop button (when S222 is NO), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data to the left twice. (S224). If it is a forward press and the operation stop button at the second stop is not the middle stop button, the operation stop button at the third stop becomes the middle stop button. Therefore, the line mask data is changed from “00010000” to “01000000” by the process of S224. As a result, the column of bit 6 corresponding to the “middle reel C line data” of the stop table for the second and third stops at the time of forward pressing is referred. Then, after the processing of S224, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding piece number determination processing (see FIG. 232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 233). ) In S205.

  In S221, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line status is not set (when S221 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the B line status is set (S225). . In S225, when the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is not set (in the case where S225 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data changing process, and the process is determined as the number of sliding frames (see FIG. 232) or the process of S205 in the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 233).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the B line status is set in S225 (when S225 is YES), the main CPU 51 rotates the line mask data once to the right (S226). By this processing, for example, when the line mask data is “00000010”, it is changed to “00000001”. As a result, the column corresponding to “B line data” in the stop table (see FIGS. 35 and 36) is referred to. Then, after the processing of S226, the main CPU 51 ends the line mask data change processing, and the processing is S190 of the sliding frame number determination processing (see FIG. 232) or the flowchart of the second and third stop processing (see FIG. 233). ) In S205.

[Priority pull-in control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 236, the priority pull-in control process performed in S191 in the flowchart (see FIG. 232) of the sliding piece number determination process will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 sets a search order table (see FIG. 39) according to the gaming state (S231). Next, the main CPU 51 sets initial values for the search order counter and the number of checks (S232). Specifically, the main CPU 51 sets “1” as an initial value in the search order counter. Further, the main CPU 51 sets the data length of the search order table as an initial value for the number of checks. Specifically, “5” is set as the initial value of the number of checks.

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the start address of a stop order table (not shown), and adds the address of the search order table based on the sliding piece number determination data (S233).

  Next, the main CPU 51 obtains the number of sliding symbols corresponding to the value of the search order counter (S234). Next, the main CPU 51 adds the acquired number of sliding frames to the expected stop start address, and acquires pull-in priority data (S235).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the pull-in priority data acquired in S315 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (S236). In S236, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 does not exceed the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S236 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S238 described later. Do.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S236 that the pull-in priority data acquired in S235 exceeds the pull-in priority data acquired previously (when S236 is YES), the main CPU 51 detects the slip acquired in S234. The number of frames is saved (S237).

  Next, the main CPU 51 subtracts 1 from the number of checks and adds 1 to the search order counter (S238).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of checks is “0” (S239). When the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is not “0” in S239 (when S239 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S234 and repeats the processes after S234.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of checks is “0” in S239 (when S239 is YES), the main CPU 51 restores the number of sliding symbols that have been retreated (S240). Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the priority pull-in control process and also ends the number of sliding pieces determination process (see FIG. 232).

[Control change processing]
Next, the control change process performed in S172 in the flowchart of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231) will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the third stop (S251). When the main CPU 51 determines in S251 that it is after the third stop (when S251 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and the process is S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231). Move to.

  On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not after the third stop (when S251 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is after the second stop (S252). In S252, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is after the second stop (when S252 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs a control process after the second stop (S253). The details of the second post-stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S253, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S252 that the main CPU 51 is not after the second stop (when S252 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S254). In S254, when the main CPU 51 determines that the pressing is not forward (when S254 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S254 that the main CPU 51 is the forward press (when S254 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the forward push control change table according to the forward push table change data (see FIG. 34). And the number of searches is set (S255).

  Next, the main CPU 51 acquires a scheduled stop position (S256). Then, the main CPU 51 updates the change target position according to the acquired planned stop position (S257).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the change target position updated in S257 matches the planned stop position (S258). In S258, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated change target position does not match the scheduled stop position (when S258 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the number of searches is “0”. (S259). In S259, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is not “0” (when S259 is NO), the main CPU 51 returns the process to S257 and repeats the processes after S257.

  On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 51 determines that the number of searches is “0” (in the case where S259 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets the second- Obtained as the third stop table number and set the corresponding stop table (S260).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets “0” in the C line check data (S261). After the process of S261, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231).

  In S258, when the main CPU 51 determines that the updated change target position coincides with the scheduled stop position (when S258 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs the second forward pressing according to the value of the line change status. The third stop table number and C line check data are acquired (S262).

  Next, the main CPU 51 sets the corresponding stop table based on the second and third stop table numbers for forward pressing (S263). After the process of S263, the main CPU 51 ends the control change process, and moves the process to S173 of the reel stop control process (see FIG. 231).

[Control change processing after second stop]
Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the second post-stop control change process performed in S253 in the flowchart of the control change process (see FIG. 237) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is a forward press (S271). In S271, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not a forward press (when S271 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 237). To do.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S271 that the main CPU 51 is a forward press (when S271 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether the C line check data is on (change status is “3”) or not. Is determined (S272). The C line check data is acquired by the process of S262 of the control change process (see FIG. 237). In S272, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is not on (in the case of NO determination in S272), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop and performs the control change process (FIG. 237) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the C line check data is on in S272 (when S272 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the second stop. It is determined whether or not (S273). In S273, when the main CPU 51 determines that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is not ON (when S273 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the control change process after the second stop. At the same time, the control change process (see FIG. 237) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S273 that the line change bit corresponding to the stop start position at the time of the second stop is on (when S273 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines that the stored forward push is performed. “1” is added to the second and third stop table numbers, and the corresponding stop table is set (S274). Next, the main CPU 51 sets the C line status (S275). Then, after the process of S275, the main CPU 51 ends the second post-stop control change process and also ends the control change process (see FIG. 237).

[RT control processing]
Next, the RT control process performed in S17 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the RT control process described below is executed by the main control circuit 41.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 13) and checks RT game state transition conditions that can be established in the transition source (current) RT game state (S281).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (S282). In S282, when the main CPU 51 determines that the RT gaming state transition condition is not satisfied (when S282 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S284 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S282 that the RT gaming state transition condition is satisfied (when S282 is YES), the main CPU 51 refers to the RT transition table (see FIG. 13) and transitions. Based on the conditions, the destination RT gaming state flag is set to a predetermined bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 47), and the gaming state flag storage area is updated (S283).

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs display command transmission processing (S284). Specifically, the main CPU 51 transmits a display command to the sub control circuit 42. The display command includes parameters that specify a display combination, a payout number, and the like. Then, after the process of S284, the main CPU 51 ends the RT control process and moves the process to S18 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Game control processing at the end of the game]
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the game end time effect control process performed in S18 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 refers to the output condition table (see FIG. 43) and outputs a jackpot signal (S291). Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the RT gaming state is the RT2 gaming state (S292). In S292, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not in the RT2 gaming state (when S292 is NO), the main CPU 51 shifts the processing to S301 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S292 that it is in the RT2 gaming state (when S292 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not it is “game lock 9” (S293). In S293, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is “game lock 9” (when S293 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to S19.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not “game lock 9” in S293 (when S293 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the internal winning combination is “normal lip” ( S294). In S294, when the main CPU 51 determines that it is not “normal lip” (when S294 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process is the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to S19.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S294 that the main CPU 51 is “normal lip” (when S294 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the output counter is “0” (S295). . In S295, when the main CPU 51 determines that the output counter is not “0” (when S295 is NO), the main CPU 51 shifts the processing to S297 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that the output counter is “0” in S295 (when S295 is YES), the main CPU 51 sets “3” in the output counter (S296).

  After S296 or when S295 is NO, the main CPU 51 refers to the subtraction condition table (see FIG. 44) and determines whether or not the subtraction condition is satisfied (S297). When the main CPU 51 determines in S297 that the subtraction condition is not satisfied (when S297 is NO), the main CPU 51 shifts the processing to S301 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S297 that the subtraction condition is satisfied (when S297 is YES), the main CPU51 subtracts 1 from the output counter value (S298).

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the output counter is “0” (S299). In S299, when the main CPU 51 determines that the output counter is not “0” (in the case where S299 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the game end effect control process, and the process proceeds to the main flow (FIG. 221). S19 of reference).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S299 that the output counter is “0” (when S299 is YES), the main CPU 51 turns on the output of the big hit signal “3” (S300). As a result, the jackpot signal “3” is transmitted to the hall computer or the calling device 100 (see FIG. 4).

  After S300 or when S292 and S297 are NO, the main CPU 51 sets “0” to the output counter (S301). After the process of S301, the main CPU 51 ends the effect control process at the end of the game, and moves the process to S19 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

  In this embodiment, when the RT gaming state is shifted to the RT2 gaming state, “3” is set in the output counter, and the value of the output counter is decremented by 1 every time the subtraction condition is satisfied. When the value of the output counter becomes “0”, the output of the big hit signal “3” is turned on. That is, in the RT2 gaming state, unless the subtraction condition is satisfied three times, the output of the big hit signal “3” is not turned on. As a result, even if “ART” is not won, such as when the recommended stop operation is not performed, even if the RT2 gaming state is mistakenly entered, the big hit “3” immediately becomes the hall computer or the calling device 100 ( (See FIG. 4).

[Bonus end check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 241, the bonus end check process performed in S20 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “BB” (“BB1” to “BB3”) is in operation with reference to the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 47) (S321). In S321, when the main CPU 51 determines that “BB” is not in operation (when S321 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check processing, and the processing is S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines that “BB” is operating in S321 (when S321 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”. Is discriminated (S322).

  In S322, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (in the case of YES determination in S322), the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end time process (S323). In this process, the main CPU 51 clears the bonus end number counter and turns off the gaming state flag (BB gaming state flag) corresponding to “BB” in operation. If the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0”, it means that the number of medals paid out exceeds 263 (BB1), 60 (BB2), or 14 (BB3) during the BB gaming state. To do.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus end command transmission process (S324). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a bonus end command to the sub-control circuit 42. The bonus end command includes information indicating that the bonus game has ended.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs an initialization process at the end of the bonus (S325). Then, after the process of S325, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and moves the process to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S322 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (when S322 is NO), the main CPU 51 determines the respective values of the winning number counter and the possible game number counter. Update (S326). The value of the winning count counter is decremented by “1” when a small role (a medal payout) is displayed, and the value of the possible number of games counter is “1” for one game regardless of the stop symbol. Subtracted.

  Next, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (S327). In S327, when the main CPU 51 determines that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the game possible number counter is not “0” (when S327 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process. The process proceeds to S21 in the main flow (see FIG. 221).

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S327 that the value of the winning number counter or the value of the possible game number counter is “0” (when S327 is YES), the main CPU 51 performs processing at the end of RB. (S328). Specifically, processing such as turning off the gaming state flag (RB gaming state flag) corresponding to “RB”, clearing the winning possible number counter and the gaming possible number counter, and the like are performed. Thereafter, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus end check process, and proceeds to S21 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Bonus activation check process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 234, the bonus operation check process performed in S21 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “BB” (“BB1” to “BB3”) is in operation (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 51 determines that “BB” is not in operation (when S331 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs the process of S334 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S331 that “BB” is in operation (in the case where S331 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines whether or not “RB” is in operation (S332). ). In S332, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RB” is in operation (in the case where S332 is YES), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 51 determines that “RB” is not in operation (when S332 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs RB operation processing based on the bonus operation table (see FIG. 12). (S333). After the process of S333, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

  If S331 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the bonus game is a win (S334). In S334, when the main CPU 51 determines that the bonus game is not a prize (when S334 is NO), the main CPU 51 performs a process of S338 described later.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S334 that the bonus game is a winning game (when S334 is YES), the main CPU 51 determines the winning bonus game based on the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 12). A corresponding bonus activation process is performed (S335). In this embodiment, in this process, the main CPU 51 refers to the bonus operating time table (see FIG. 12), sets “1” to the corresponding bit in the gaming state flag storage area (see FIG. 47), The value of the bonus end number counter is set to a predetermined value (“263” for “BB1”, “60” for “BB2”, “14” for “BB3”). Further, in this process, the RB operation process described in S333 is also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 clears the value of the carryover combination storage area (S336). Next, the main CPU 51 performs a bonus start command transmission process (S337). In this process, the main CPU 51 transmits a bonus start command to the sub-control circuit 42. The bonus start command includes information indicating that the bonus game has started. After S337, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

  When S334 is NO, the main CPU 51 determines whether or not the winning combination related to replaying is a win (S338). In S338, when the main CPU 51 determines that the role related to replay is not winning (when S338 is NO), the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and the process of the main flow (see FIG. 221). Move to S2.

  On the other hand, when the main CPU 51 determines in S338 that the winning combination related to replaying is a win (when S338 is YES), the main CPU 51 requests automatic insertion of medals (S339). That is, the main CPU 51 copies the insertion number counter to the automatic insertion number counter. After the process of S339, the main CPU 51 ends the bonus operation check process, and moves the process to S2 of the main flow (see FIG. 221).

[Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, the interrupt process by the control of the main CPU 51 performed in S12 in the main flow (see FIG. 221) will be described.

  First, the main CPU 51 saves the register (S341). Next, the main CPU 51 performs an input port check process (S342). In this process, signals input from various switches such as the stop switch 17S are checked.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a timer update process (S343). In this process, for example, the main CPU 51 performs a process of subtracting the value of the lock timer for each interrupt process. Next, the main CPU 51 performs communication data transmission processing (S344). In this processing, various commands are mainly transmitted to the main control circuit 41 and the sub control circuit 42 as appropriate.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a reel control process (S345). In this process, the main CPU 51 starts rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when the start of rotation of all the reels is requested, and thereafter, each reel rotates at a constant speed. The three stepping motors 61L, 61C, 61R are driven and controlled. When the number of sliding symbols is determined, the main CPU 51 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding symbols. Then, the main CPU 51 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the planned stop position (the symbol at the planned stop position reaches the area on the effective line (winning determination line) of the display window). The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation of the corresponding reel is decelerated and stopped. Further, in the present embodiment, in the process of S345, not only the above-described normal acceleration process, constant speed process and stop process, but also a reel effect pattern is set when the reel effect pattern is set during the acceleration process. Reel effect (reel action) and lock control processing are also performed.

  Next, the main CPU 51 performs a lamp and 7-segment driving process (S346). In this process, the main CPU 51 controls the 7-segment display 6 to display the number of payouts and the number of credits. Next, the main CPU 51 performs a register restoration process (S347). After that, the main CPU 51 ends the interrupt process.

<Description of operation of sub-control circuit>
Next, the contents of various processes (tasks) executed by the sub CPU 81 of the sub control circuit 42 using a program will be described with reference to FIGS. 244 to 258.

[Main board communication task]
First, the main board communication task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs reception check of the command transmitted from the main control circuit 41 (S501). Next, when receiving a command, the sub CPU 81 extracts the type of the received command (S502).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a command different from the previous command is received (S503). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S503 that the command different from the previous command has not been received (when S503 is NO), the sub CPU 81 returns the process to S501 and repeats the processes after S501.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S503 that the sub CPU 81 has received a command different from the previous one (when S503 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores a message in the message queue based on the received command (S504). ). The message queue is a mechanism for exchanging information between processes. Then, after the processing of S504, the sub CPU 81 returns the processing to S501 and repeats the processing after S501.

[Direction registration task]
Next, an effect registration task performed by the sub CPU 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the sub CPU 81 extracts a message from the message queue (S511). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether there is a message in the message queue (S512). In S512, when the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no message in the message queue (when S 512 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S515 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S512 that there is a message in the message queue (when S512 is YES), the sub CPU 81 copies game information from the message (S513). In this process, for example, various data such as an internal winning combination, a type of reel that has stopped rotating, a display combination, and a game state flag specified by parameters are copied to a storage area (not shown) provided in the sub RAM 83. The

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect content determination processing (S514). In this process, the sub CPU 81 determines the contents of the effect, registers the effect data, and the like according to the type of the received command. Details of the effect content determination process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers animation data (S515). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers sound data (S516). Next, the sub CPU 81 registers lamp data (S517). These registration processes are performed based on the effect data registered in the effect content determination process in S514. Sub-CPU81 returns a process to S511 after S517, and repeats the process after S511.

[Production content decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 246, the effect content determination process performed in S514 in the flowchart of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a start command is received (S521).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S521 that the start command is being received (S521 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a start command receiving process (S522). In this process, the sub CPU 81 extracts a random number for production, determines the production number by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the like and registers it. Here, the production number is data for designating the production content to be executed this time. Details of the start command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers start effect data in accordance with the registered effect number (S523). The effect data is data that designates animation data, sound data, and lamp data. Therefore, when the effect data is registered, the corresponding animation data and the like are determined, and effects such as display of video are executed. Then, after the process of S523, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S521 that the start command is not received (S521 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the reel stop command is received (S524).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S524 that the reel stop command is being received (when S524 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the stop time according to the registered effect number and the type of the operation stop button. The effect data is registered (S525). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S524 that the reel stop command is not received (when S524 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the display command is received (S526).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S526 that the display command is being received (S526 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a display command receiving process (S527). Details of the display command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 registers the effect data at the time of display according to the registered effect number and display combination (S528). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S526 that the display command is not received (when S526 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the payout end command is received (S529). In S529, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is time to receive a payout end command (when S529 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs payout end command reception processing (S530). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S529 that it is not at the time of receiving the payout end command (when S529 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is at the time of receiving the bonus start command (S531).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S531 that the bonus start command is being received (when S531 is YES), the sub CPU 81 registers effect data for starting the bonus (S532). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S531 that the bonus start command is not received (S531 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the bonus end command is received (S533). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S533 that the bonus end command has been received (YES in S533), the sub CPU 81 registers the bonus end effect data (S534). Thereafter, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S533 that the bonus end command is not received (when S533 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a no-operation command is received (S535). In S535, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not a no-operation command reception (when S 535 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process and the process of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245). Move to S515.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S535 that the sub CPU 81 is receiving a no-operation command (when S535 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a no-operation command receiving process (S536). The details of the non-operation command reception process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the processing of S536, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect content determination process, and moves the process to S515 of the effect registration task (see FIG. 245).

[Start command reception processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 247, the start command reception time process performed in S522 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 246) will be described. In this embodiment, the start command reception process described below is executed by the sub-control circuit 42.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs lottery flag determination processing (S541). The details of the lottery flag determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a mode lottery process (S542).

  In the present embodiment, when the sub game state is the “general state”, a plurality of modes having different probabilities of winning the “CZ (chance zone)” are provided. In the process of S542, a lottery of a plurality of modes in this “general state” is performed. In this transition lottery, a mode lottery table (not shown) in which lottery values for each mode are set according to the internal winning combination is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs CZ lottery processing (S543). In this process, a CZ lottery table (not shown) in which CZ lottery values are set according to the internal winning combination and mode is used.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an ART lottery process (S544). The details of the ART lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 249 described later. Next, the sub CPU 81 performs ART processing (S545). Details of the ART processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 250 described later.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a VR lottery process (S546). Details of the VR lottery processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect determination process (S547). The details of the effect determination process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S547, the sub CPU 81 ends the process at the time of receiving the start command, and moves the process to S523 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 246).

[Lottery flag decision processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 248, the lottery flag determination process performed in S541 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247) will be described. In the present embodiment, the lottery flag determination process described below is executed by the sub control circuit 42.

  First, the sub CPU 81 changes the small role / replay data pointer based on the special flag lottery table (see FIG. 57) (S551). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the small role / replay data pointer is “9” (S552).

  In step S552, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the small role / replay data pointer is “9” (in the case of YES determination in step S552), the sub CPU 81 determines based on the lottery (1/10 winning). The combination / replay data pointer is changed to “40” (S553). After the processing of S553, the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S556 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the small role / replay data pointer is not “9” in S552 (when S552 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the small role / replay data pointer is “43”. It is determined whether or not (S554). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S554 that the small role / replay data pointer is not “43” (when S554 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S556 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the small role / replay data pointer is “43” in S554 (when S554 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the lottery (1/2 wins). Then, the small role / replay data pointer is changed to “42” (S555).

  After the processing of S553, S555, or when S554 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines various lottery flags based on the various lottery flag lottery tables (FIGS. 57 to 70) and stores them in the sub RAM 83 (S556). . After the process of S556, the sub CPU 81 ends the lottery flag determination process, and moves the process to S542 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

[ART lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 249, the ART lottery process performed in S544 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs an ART lottery based on various ART lottery tables (see FIGS. 71 to 88, FIGS. 92 to 96, FIGS. 98 to 121, FIGS. 123 to 130, and 136 to 140). (S561). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the lottery result is “0” (S562). In S562, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result is “0” (when S562 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART lottery process and starts the process when the start command is received (see FIG. 247). ) To S545.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the lottery result is not “0” in S562 (when S562 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the stock content determination table of the ART lottery result (see FIG. 144). The winning content is checked (S563).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not “B_ART” or “D_ART” has been won (S563). In S563, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “B_ART” or “D_ART” has been won (when S563 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the ART stock area allocation lottery table (FIGS. 89, 90, and 132 to 132). Referring to FIG. 135), the ART stock area is determined based on the lottery flag (S564). That is, one of the ART stock area A and the ART stock area B is determined as an ART stock area for storing the winning information of “B_ART” or “D_ART”.

  After the processing of S564 or when the sub CPU 81 determines that “B_ART” or “D_ART” has not been won in S563 (when S563 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines the table number determination table (FIG. 91, FIG. 91). 97, 122, 131, 138 and 141), the table number is acquired based on the type of the ART lottery table and the lottery flag (S565).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 stores the corresponding winning information in the storage area corresponding to the winning content in the sub storage area (S566). For example, when “B_ART” or “D_ART” is won, the winning information (ART identification information and table number) is stored in the ART stock area A or ART stock area B determined in S564. When “G_ART” is won, winning information (table number and ART mode at the time of stock) is stored in the combined stock area. If “R_ART” is won, “1” is set to the rocket flag. When “VR (Viking Rush)” is won, “1” is added to the VR stock counter.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines the number of ART precursor games based on the precursor game number lottery table (see FIGS. 165 to 170) and sets it in the ART precursor counter (S567). After the process of S567, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART lottery process and moves the process to S545 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

[Processing during ART]
Next, with reference to FIG. 250, a description will be given of the ART processing performed in S545 in the flowchart of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247).

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not “B_ART” is in progress (S571). When the sub CPU 81 determines that “B_ART” is being performed in S571 (when S571 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a lottery process for adding the number of games (S572). In this process, when the number of added games is determined, the determined number of added games is added to the ART game number counter.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S571 that the sub CPU 81 is not in “B_ART” (when S571 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is in “D_ART” (S573). In S573, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “D_ART” is not in progress (when S573 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing, and executes the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247). Move to S546.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S573 that the sub CPU 81 is in “D_ART” (when S573 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a continuous stock lottery process (S574). In this process, when the continuation stock is determined, “1” is added to the continuation stock counter. After the processing of S574, the sub CPU 81 ends the ART processing, and moves the processing to S546 of the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247).

[VR related processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 251, the VR-related process performed in S546 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not “VR (hiking rush)” is in progress (S581). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S581 that the “VR (hiking rush)” is not in progress (when S581 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game lock flag 9 has been won (S582). . That is, it is determined whether or not bit 0 of the game lock flag storage area 2 (see FIG. 52) is “1”.

  In S582, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game lock flag 9 is not winning (when S 582 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related processing, and starts the processing when the start command is received (see FIG. 247). ) To S547.

  On the other hand, in S582, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game lock flag 9 is winning (when S 582 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines the VR lock billy touch correct / incorrect answer lottery table (see FIG. 145). ) To determine the touch correspondence (correct touch answer) (S583). After the process of S583, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR related process, and moves the process to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

  Further, in S581, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “VR (hiking rush)” is being performed (S581 is YES), the sub CPU 81 is based on the VR revolution lottery table (FIGS. 150 to 164). Thus, whether or not the revolution is activated is determined, and the value of the VR revolution flag is set (S584).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines a touch response (correct touch) based on the VR billy touch lottery table (see FIGS. 146 to 149) (S585). After the process of S585, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related process, and moves the process to S547 of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

[Direction determination processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 252, the effect determination process performed in S547 in the flowchart of the start command reception process (see FIG. 247) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not a continuous production (continuation game) is being performed (S601). In this process, if the value of “Scenario No.” or “Map No.” is other than “0”, the sub CPU 81 determines that a continuous production (continuous game) is being performed.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S601 that the continuous effect (continuous game) is not being performed (NO in S601), the sub CPU 81 performs an effect lottery process (S602). In this effect lottery process, an effect lottery table (not shown) is referred to determine the “effect No.” (including the development effect) based on the lottery flag, the number of precursor games, etc., and set in the sub RAM 83. The development effect in this embodiment is a title display game. It consists of a continuous production (continuation game) that follows the title display game.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the “production No.” determined in S602 is an advanced production (S603). In step S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the “effect No.” determined in step S602 is not a development effect (in the case where S603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and receives a start command. The time process (see FIG. 247) is also terminated.

  On the other hand, in S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the “production No.” determined in S602 is the development effect (when S603 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the determined “production No.” Then, it is determined whether or not the “production No.” corresponding to the development production 1 (S604).

  In S604, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determined “production No.” is the “production No.” corresponding to the development effect 1 (when S604 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the development effect 1 The title lottery process is performed with reference to the title lottery table (see FIG. 171) (S605). Thereby, the “title No.” for the development effect 1 is determined, and the “title No.” is registered in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs scenario lottery processing with reference to a scenario lottery table (not shown) (S606). Thereby, the “scenario No.” for the development effect 1 is determined, and the “scenario No.” is registered in the sub RAM 83. After the process of S606, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

  On the other hand, in S603, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the “production No.” determined in S602 is not the development effect (when S603 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines that the determined “production No.” Then, it is determined whether or not the “production No.” corresponding to the development effect 2 (S607).

  In S607, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the determined “production No.” is not “production No.” corresponding to the development effect 2 (when S604 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the effect determination process. And the start command reception process (see FIG. 247) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S607 that the determined “production No.” is the “production No.” corresponding to the development effect 2 (when S604 is YES), the sub CPU 81 develops. With reference to the effect 2 title lottery table (see FIG. 191), a title lottery process is performed (S608). Thereby, the “title No.” for the development effect 2 is determined, and the “title No.” is registered in the sub RAM 83.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs map lottery processing with reference to the map lottery table for development effect 2 (see FIGS. 192 and 193) (S609). Thereby, the “map No.” for the development effect 2 is determined, and the “map No.” is registered in the sub RAM 83. After the processing of S609, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination processing and also ends the start command reception processing (see FIG. 247).

  In S601, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the continuous production (continuous game) is being performed (when S601 is YES), the sub CPU 81 adds “1” to the continuous game number counter (S610). The value of the continuation game number counter is set to “0” when “scenario No.” or “map No.” is cleared. Thereby, the value of the continuation game number counter becomes “1” by adding “1” when the game is started.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not “scenario No.” is “0” (S611). In S611, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “scenario No.” is not “0” (when S 611 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a scenario rewriting lottery process (S612).

  In the scenario rewriting lottery process, the scenario rewriting lottery table (see FIGS. 175 to 190) is referred to, and whether or not to rewrite the “scenario No.” is determined by lottery based on the currently registered “scenario No.”. To do. When it is determined to rewrite “scenario No.”, “scenario No.” is changed to the rewriting destination value.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect determination process during the scenario (S613).
In the effect determination process in the scenario, referring to the effect number determination table for development effect 1 (see FIGS. 172 and 173), based on the current “scenario No.” and the value of the continuation game number counter, Determine the production number. Then, the determined effect number for development effect 1 is registered in the sub RAM 83. In the effect determination process during the scenario, when the effect number for development effect 1 corresponding to the final game of the continuous effect (continuation game) is determined, the “scenario No.” and the continuation game number counter are cleared.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect rewriting process (S614). Details of the effect rewriting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S614, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

  In S611, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “scenario No.” is “0” (when S611 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines whether “map No.” is “0” or not. Is determined (S615). In S615, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the “map No.” is “0” (in the case where S615 is YES), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and the start command reception process (FIG. 247) also ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “Map No.” is not “0” in S615 (when S615 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs map rewriting lottery processing (S616).

  In the map rewriting lottery process, the map rewriting lottery table (see FIGS. 201 to 216) is referred to, and whether or not to rewrite the “map No.” is determined by lottery based on the currently registered “map number”. To do. When it is determined to rewrite “Map No.”, “Map No.” is changed to the rewriting destination value.

Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a mid-map effect determination process (S617).
In the effect determination process in the map, first, the effect lottery table number is determined based on the current “map No.” and the value of the continuous game number counter with reference to the effect lottery table number determination table (see FIG. 194). . Next, with reference to the effect lottery table (see FIGS. 195 to 200) corresponding to the determined effect lottery table number, the development effect 2 effect number is determined based on the sub gaming state. Then, the determined effect number for development effect 2 is registered in the sub RAM 83. Also, in the effect determination process during map, when the development effect 2 effect number corresponding to the final game of the continuous effect (continuation game) is determined, the “map No.” and the continuation game number counter are cleared.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs an effect rewriting process (S618). Details of the effect rewriting process will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S618, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect determination process and also ends the start command reception process (see FIG. 247).

[Direction rewriting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 253, the effect rewriting process performed in S614 or S618 in the flowchart of the effect determination process (see FIG. 252) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 refers to the effect rewriting condition table (see FIG. 217) and performs an effect rewriting determination process (S621). In this effect rewriting determination process, it is determined whether or not the effect is rewritten based on the lottery flag K and the currently registered effect number for development effect 1 or the effect number for development effect 2.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not an effect rewriting condition is satisfied in the effect rewriting determination process of S621 (S622). In S622, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the effect rewriting conditions are not satisfied (when S622 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the effect rewriting process and also ends the effect determining process (see FIG. 252).

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S622 that the sub CPU 81 satisfies the effect rewriting condition (when S622 is YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the determined effect number for development effect 1 or effect number for development effect 2 (S623).

  In the present embodiment, the continuous effect (continuous game) is forcibly ended when the game progresses without a sense of incongruity by ending the continuous effect (continuous game) halfway. In the process of S623, “scenario No.”, “map No.”, and the continuation game number counter are also cleared.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 performs effect lottery processing (S624). In this effect lottery process, the same process as the effect lottery process performed in S602 in the flowchart of the effect determination process (see FIG. 252) is performed. That is, in the process of S624, “effect No.” is determined again. After the processing of S624, the sub CPU 81 ends the effect rewriting process and also ends the effect determination process (see FIG. 252).

[Process when receiving display command]
Next, with reference to FIG. 254, the display combination command reception process performed in S527 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 246) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 performs a count process (S631). The details of the count process will be described later with reference to FIG. Next, the sub CPU 81 performs a VR related display process (S632). Details of the VR related display processing will be described later with reference to FIG. After the process of S632, the sub CPU 81 ends the display combination command reception process, and moves the process to S528 of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 246).

[Count processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 255, the count process performed in S631 in the flowchart (see FIG. 254) of the display combination command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not “VR (Viking Rush)” or “R_ART” is in progress (S641). In S641, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is “VR” or “R_ART” (when S 641 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S641 that the sub CPU 81 is not “VR” or “R_ART” (S641 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is “G_ART”. (S642). In S642, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “G_ART” is in progress (when S642 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts “1” from the value of the combined game number counter (S643).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the combined game number counter has become “0” (S644). In S644, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the combined game number counter is not “0” (when S 644 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S644 that the value of the combined game number counter has become “0” (when S644 is YES), the sub CPU 81 clears the corresponding sub storage area (S645). Specifically, “0” is stored in the merge mode storage area and merge identification data.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not data (winning information) is stored in the G_ART stock area (S646). In S646, when the sub CPU 81 determines that data (winning information) is not stored in the G_ART stock area (when S646 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that data (winning information) is stored in the G_ART stock area in S646 (when S646 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a G_ART start process (S647). After the process of S647, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S659 described later.

  In the G_ART start process, a combined game number lottery table (not shown) is referred to, and the combined game number is determined based on the table number. Then, the determined combined game number is set in the combined game number counter. Further, the coalescence mode lottery table (not shown) is referred to, and the coalescence mode is determined based on the table number and stored in the sub RAM 83. Further, “1” is set to the value of the merge identification data storage area. Then, the reference destination (winning information corresponding to the head address) of the G_ART stock area is cleared, and the remaining winning information is moved up by one address.

  In the present embodiment, the number of merging precursor games is not determined in the G_ART start process of S647. That is, when “G_ART” corresponding to the winning information of “G_ART” stored in the G_ART stock area is started after “G_ART” is ended, no precursor game is passed. However, in the gaming machine according to the present invention, when “G_ART” corresponding to the winning information of “G_ART” stored in the G_ART stock area is started after “G_ART” is ended, Also good. In this case, in the G_ART start time process of S647, the number of combined sign games is determined.

  In S642, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is not “G_ART” (when S642 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether it is “D_ART” or “B_ART”. (S648). In S648, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “D_ART” or “B_ART” is being performed (when S648 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART game number counter ( S649).

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the value of the ART game number counter has become “0” (S650). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter is not “0” in S650 (when S650 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the ART game number counter has become “0” in S650 (when S650 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the continuous stock counter is “D_ART”. Is determined to be equal to or greater than “1” (S651).

  In S651, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “D_ART” is in progress and the value of the continuation stock counter is “1” or more (when S651 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs D_ART continuation processing ( S652). After the processing of S652, the sub CPU 81 performs processing of S659 described later.

  In the D_ART continuation process, “1” is subtracted from the value of the continuation stock counter. Further, the number of ART games is determined with reference to a continuing ART game number lottery table (not shown). Then, the determined ART game number is set in the ART game number counter. The number of ART games at the time of continuation may be the same as the number of ART games determined at the beginning.

  In this embodiment, the loop mode and ART mode at the time of continuation are not changed. However, the loop mode and ART mode at the time of continuation according to the present invention may be changed by lottery.

  In S651, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “D_ART” is in progress and the value of the continuation stock counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (when S651 is NO), the sub CPU 81 displays the corresponding sub storage area. Is cleared (S653). Specifically, “0” is stored in the ART mode storage area, loop mode storage area, and ART identification data storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not data (winning information) is stored in the ART stock area A (S654). When the sub CPU 81 determines that data is stored in the ART stock area A in S654 (when S654 is YES), the sub CPU 81 starts the ART based on the winning information stocked in the ART stock area A. Time processing is performed (S655). After the process of S655, the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S659 described later.

  In the ART start process, the winning information corresponding to the head address of the ART stock area A is referred to. Then, an ART game number lottery table (not shown) is referred to, and the number of ART games is determined based on the table number. Then, the determined ART game number is set in the ART game number counter. Further, the ART mode lottery table (not shown) is referred to, and the ART mode is determined based on the table number and stored in the sub RAM 83.

  Further, “1” or “2” is stored in the ART identification data storage area. That is, if the winning information corresponding to the head address of the ART stock area A is the winning information related to “D_ART”, “1” is stored in the ART identification data storage area, and if the winning information is related to “B_ART”. Then, “2” is stored in the ART identification data storage area.

  Further, the consumption / non-consumption is determined with reference to the ART stock non-consumption lottery table (see FIGS. 142 and 143). At this time, if non-consumption is determined, the winning information referred to in the ART stock area A (winning information corresponding to the head address) is not cleared. On the other hand, when the consumption is determined, the winning information referred to in the ART stock area A is cleared, and the remaining winning information is moved up to the next higher address.

  If the winning information corresponding to the head address of the ART stock area A is the winning information related to “D_ART”, the loop mode is determined based on the table number with reference to a loop mode lottery table (not shown). Then, it is stored in the sub RAM 83.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S654 that no data is stored in the ART stock area A (when S654 is NO), the sub CPU 81 stores data (winning information) in the ART stock area B. It is determined whether or not (S656). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S656 that no data is stored in the ART stock area B (when S656 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs the process of S659 described later.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S656 that data is stored in the ART stock area B (when S656 is YES), the sub CPU 81 determines based on the winning information stocked in the ART stock area B. An ART start process is performed (S657). This ART start process is the same as the ART start process in S655. After the process of S657, the sub CPU 81 performs a process of S659 described later.

  In S648, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “D_ART” and “B_ART” are not in progress (NO in S648), the sub CPU 81 performs ceiling count processing (S658). In the ceiling counting process, the number of games after the end of the bonus is counted, and when the number of games after the end of the bonus reaches a predetermined value (for example, 1400), a special ART lottery table (part 2) (FIG. 140), an ART lottery is performed.

  After S647, S652, S655, S657, and S658, if S644, S646, S650, and S656 are NO, or if S641 is YES, the sub CPU 81 performs a precursor check process (S659). Details of the warning check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 256 described later. After the process of S659, the sub CPU 81 ends the count process, and moves the process to S632 of the display combination command reception process (see FIG. 254).

  As described above, in this embodiment, when data (winning information) is stored in the ART stock area A and the ART stock area B, it is activated from “ART” related to the winning information stocked in the ART stock area A. . That is, “ART” that displays (notifies) that it is won or is scheduled to be notified is activated, and then “ART” that does not display (not notify) that “ART” is won is activated.

[Precursor check processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 256, the precursor check process performed in S632 in the flowchart (see FIG. 254) of the display combination command reception process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a precursor (S661). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of precursor games is set in various precursor counters (CZ precursor counter, ART precursor counter, coalescence precursor counter, rocket precursor counter, and VR precursor counter). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S661 that the warning is not in progress (when S661 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the warning check process and also ends the display combination command reception process (see FIG. 254). .

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S661 that the sub CPU 81 is a precursor (when S661 is YES), the sub CPU 81 subtracts “1” from the values of various precursor counters (S662). Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the values of various precursor counters are “0” (S663). In S663, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the values of the various precursor counters are not “0” (in the case of NO determination in S663), the sub CPU 81 ends the precursor check process and receives the display combination command reception process ( The process also ends (see FIG. 254).

  On the other hand, in S663, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the value of the various precursor counters is “0” (in the case of YES determination in S663), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the CZ (chance zone) starts. It is determined (S664). That is, it is determined whether the counter that has become “0” is a CZ precursor counter.

  In S664, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the CZ (chance zone) starts (when S664 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs CZ start processing (S665). After the process of S665, the sub CPU 81 ends the warning check process and also ends the display combination command reception process (see FIG. 254).

  In the CZ start time process, the CZ game number lottery table (not shown) is referred to determine the CZ game number and set it in the CZ game number counter. Further, “1” is stored in the CZ identification data storage area.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S664 that it is not the time of starting CZ (chance zone) (when S664 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time of starting ART (S666). That is, it is determined whether the counter that has become “0” is an ART precursor counter.

  In S666, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is the ART start time (when S666 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an ART start process based on the winning information stocked in the ART stock area A (S667). ). This ART start time process is the same as the ART start time process of S655 in the count process flowchart (FIG. 255). After the processing of S667, the sub CPU 81 ends the warning check process and also ends the display combination command reception process (see FIG. 254).

  In this embodiment, when “ART” is first hit, the winning information of “ART” is always stocked in the ART stock area A (see FIGS. 89 and 90). Therefore, the winning information stocked in the ART stock area A is always referred to in the ART start process in S667.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S666 that the sub CPU 81 is not at the start of ART (when S666 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the start of “G_ART” (S668). That is, it is determined whether or not the counter that has become “0” is a coalescence precursor counter.

  In S668, when the sub CPU 81 determines that it is time to start “G_ART” (when S668 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs G_ART start time processing (S669). This G_ART start time process is the same as the G_ART start time process of S647 in the flowchart of the count process (FIG. 255). After the process of S669, the sub CPU 81 ends the warning check process and also ends the display combination command reception process (see FIG. 254).

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S668 that it is not the time to start “G_ART” (when S668 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time to start “R_ART” (S670). That is, it is determined whether the counter that has become “0” is a rocket precursor counter.

  In S670, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “R_ART” starts (when S670 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs R_ART start processing (S671). After the process of S671, the sub CPU 81 ends the warning check process and also ends the display combination command reception process (see FIG. 254).

  In the R_ART start process, a merge mode lottery table (not shown) is referred to, a merge mode is determined based on the table number, and stored in the sub RAM 83. Further, “1” is stored in the rocket identification data storage area. Further, “0” is stored in the rocket flag storage area.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S670 that it is not the time to start “R_ART” (when S670 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the time to start “VR” (S672). That is, it is determined whether the counter that has become “0” is a VR precursor counter.

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S672 that it is not at the time of starting “VR” (when S672 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the warning check process and receives the display combination command (see FIG. 254). Also ends.

  On the other hand, in S672, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “VR” starts (when S672 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs VR start processing (S673). After the process of S673, the sub CPU 81 ends the warning check process and also ends the display combination command reception process (see FIG. 254).

  In the VR start process, “1” is subtracted from the value of the VR stock counter. Further, “1” is stored in the VR identification data storage area. As a result, the sub gaming state becomes “VR”. That is, “VR” is started from the next game (game) in which the VR start processing of S673 is performed.

[VR related display processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 257, the VR related display time process performed in S632 in the flowchart (see FIG. 254) of the display combination command reception time process will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not “VR” is in progress (S681). When the sub CPU 81 determines in S681 that it is not in “VR” (when S681 is NO), the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not it is the game lock 9 (S682).

  When the sub CPU 81 determines in S682 that it is not the game lock 9 (if S682 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the VR related display time processing and also displays the display combination command reception processing (see FIG. 254). Exit.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in S682 that the sub CPU 81 is the game lock 9 (in the case where S682 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a lock correct / incorrect touch determination process (S683). In the lock correct / incorrect determination process, the lottery table for VR correct / incorrect billy touch (FIG. 145) is referred to, touch correspondence determined when the start lever 16 is operated (touch correct answer), and touch operation identification data storage. The correctness is determined based on the value of the area.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the result of the lock touch correct / incorrect determination process in S683 is a touch success (S684). When the sub CPU 81 determines that the touch is not successful in S684 (when S684 is NO), the sub CPU 81 stores “0” in the VR identification data storage area and ends the VR related display time process. The display combination command reception process (see FIG. 254) is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S684 that the touch is successful (S684 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs a VR start process (S685). In the VR start process, “1” is subtracted from the value of the VR stock counter. Further, “1” is stored in the VR identification data storage area. Subsequent to the processing of S685, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR related display time processing and ends the display combination command reception time processing (see FIG. 254).

  In S681, when the sub CPU 81 determines that “VR” is being performed (YES in S681), the sub CPU 81 performs a VR touch correct / incorrect determination process (S686). In VR touch correct / incorrect determination processing, the VR correspondence bill lottery tables (FIGS. 146 to 149) are referred to, and the touch response (correct touch) determined when the start lever 16 is operated and the value of the touch operation identification data storage area are determined. Based on the above, the correctness is determined.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game in “VR” is the 6G (game) or later (S687). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of touch challenges is the sixth or later. In S687, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game in “VR” is not the 6th game or later (when S687 is NO), the sub CPU 81 performs a VR update process (S688). In the VR update process, the VR touch correct / incorrect determination process result (touch failure or touch success) is stored in the VR correct / incorrect identification data storage area.

  Next, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the touch is successful and the VR revolution flag is ON (the VR revolution flag is “1”) (S689). In S689, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the touch is successful and the VR revolution flag is on (when S 689 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs rewriting processing during VR (S690). In the rewriting process during VR, all the results of the touch correctness determination process during VR up to the present are all rewritten successfully.

  After the processing of S690 or when S689 is NO, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not the game in VR is the 5G (game) eye (S691). That is, it is determined whether or not data (“0” or “1”) is stored in all of the VR correct / incorrect identification data storage areas. When the sub CPU 81 determines in S691 that the game in “VR” is not the 5G game (when S691 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the VR related display processing and receives the display combination command. The processing (see FIG. 254) ends.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S691 that the game in VR is the 5G game (when S691 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs an addition process in VR (S692). Subsequent to the processing of S692, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR-related display processing and ends the display combination command reception processing (see FIG. 254).

  In the VR extra processing in S692, the sub CPU 81 determines the number of additional games based on the value of the VR correct / incorrect identification data storage area, and adds the determined additional games to the ART game number counter. If all the touches are not correct, the sub CPU 81 stores “0” in the VR identification data storage area and clears the value of the VR correct / incorrect identification data storage area.

  If the values in the VR correct / incorrect identification data storage area are all “0” (if all are incorrect touches), “1” is added to the value of the VR stock counter. That is, if all the touch answers are incorrect in “VR”, “VR” is started again.

  In S687, when the sub CPU 81 determines that the game in “VR” is the 6th game or later (S687 is YES), the sub CPU 81 performs VR extra processing (S693). After the processing of S693, the sub CPU 81 ends the VR related display time processing and ends the display combination command reception processing (see FIG. 254).

  In the VR extra process of S693, when the result of the VR touch correct / incorrect determination process is a touch correct answer, the sub CPU 81 adds “320” to the value of the ART game number counter. On the other hand, if the result of the VR touch correct / incorrect determination process is incorrect touch, the sub CPU 81 stores “0” in the VR identification data storage area and clears the value of the VR correct / incorrect identification data storage area.

[Processing when no operation command is received]
Next, with reference to FIG. 258, the non-operation command reception process performed in S536 in the flowchart of the effect content determination process (see FIG. 246) will be described.

  First, the sub CPU 81 determines whether or not there is a touch input (S701). When the sub CPU 81 determines that there is no touch input in S701 (when S701 is NO), the sub CPU 81 ends the no-operation command reception process and also ends the effect content determination process (see FIG. 246). To do.

  On the other hand, when the sub CPU 81 determines in S701 that there is a touch input (when S701 is YES), the sub CPU 81 stores data corresponding to the touch input in the touch operation identification data storage area corresponding to the touch input. (S702). After the processing of S702, the sub CPU 81 ends the no-operation command reception processing and also ends the effect content determination processing (see FIG. 246).

  In S702, when a touch operation (input) is performed on the character decoration unit 22L, “1” is stored in the touch operation identification data storage area, and when a touch operation is performed on the character decoration unit 22R, “2” is stored in the touch operation identification data storage area.

[Billy Bonus]
Next, the billy bonus will be described.
The billy bonus is determined when “C_Billy” is determined as an internal winning combination and a symbol combination (“Billy”-“Billy”-“Billy”) corresponding to “C_Billy” is displayed along the winning determination line. Operate.

  In the present embodiment, during the operation of the billy bonus (during the billy bonus), a notification that there is a possibility that “Don”-“Don”-“Don”, which is a combination of specific symbols, may be stopped (“Don”). ”-“ Don ”-“ Don ”is instructed to aim for stop display). Thereby, the player can recognize that there is a possibility that “Don”-“Don”-“Don”, which is a combination of specific symbols, may be stopped and displayed during the billy bonus.

  The gaming state in which the billy bonus is operating is the BB3 gaming state (see FIG. 12). In addition, while the operation of BB3 is performed, the operation of RB3 is continuously performed, and the RB3 gaming state is in the RB3 gaming state. Therefore, during the billy bonus, an internal winning combination is determined with reference to the internal lottery table for RB3 gaming state (see FIG. 22).

  When referring to the RB3 gaming state internal lottery table (see FIG. 22), one of the winning numbers “1” to “6” or “losing” is determined. When any one of the winning numbers “1” to “6” is determined, any one of “33” to “38” is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay.

  In the internal lottery with reference to the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state, for example, when the winning number “3” (abbreviation “F_Billy S Donbell”) is won, “33” is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay. When “33” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer, “C_Billy Medium 1”, “C_Billy Medium 2”, “C_Billy Medium” 5 and “C_C Bell” are used as the internal winning combination. And the like are determined (see FIG. 30).

  If the symbol combination (“Bell”-“Don”-“Bell”) corresponding to “C_Billy Medium 1” is displayed along the winning line during the billy bonus, 15 medals will be paid out. (See FIG. 11), and the billy bonus ends. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to “C_Billy medium part 1” is displayed along the winning determination line, if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing, the combination of specific symbols (“don” − “ Don "-" Don ") is displayed along the cross-down line (invalid line). The cross-down line is a line connecting the upper area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R within the frame of the display window 4.

  If the symbol combination (“Bell”-“Don”-“Lip 1”) corresponding to “C_Billy Medium 2” is displayed along the winning line during the billy bonus, 15 medals will be paid It is issued (see FIG. 11), and the billy bonus ends. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to “C_Billy medium part 2” is displayed along the winning determination line, the combination of specific symbols (“don” − “ Don "-" Don ") is displayed along the cross-up line (invalid line). The cross-up line is a line connecting the lower area of the left reel 3L, the middle area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R within the frame of the display window 4.

  If the symbol combination (“Bell”-“Bell”-“Lip 1”) corresponding to “C_Billy protagonist 5” is displayed along the winning line during the billy bonus, 15 medals are paid out. It is issued (see FIG. 11), and the billy bonus ends. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to “C_Billy medium part 5” is displayed along the winning determination line, if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing, the combination of specific symbols (“don” − “ "Don"-"Don") is displayed along the top line (invalid line). The top line is a line connecting the upper area of the left reel 3L, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R within the frame of the display window 4.

  As described above, the player recognizes that the combination of specific symbols (“don”-“don”-“don”) may be stopped and displayed during the billy bonus. Then, when the player performs a stop operation such that a combination of specific symbols (“don”-“don”-“don”) is stopped and displayed, the above-described stop button pressing timing tends to be a predetermined timing. .

  “C_Billy medium combination 1”, “C_Billy medium combination 2”, and “C_Billy medium combination 5” in the present embodiment are specific examples of the first internal winning combination. That is, the first internal winning combination has a designated number (15) exceeding the specified number (14) that triggers the end of the bonus game when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed along the winning determination line. It is an internal winning combination where medals are paid out. Further, an internal winning combination that allows a combination of specific symbols (“don”-“don”-“don”) to be displayed along a straight line (invalid line) other than the winning determination line within the frame of the display window. It is.

  On the other hand, when the symbol combination (“bell”-“bell”-“bell”) corresponding to “C_C bell” is displayed along the winning determination line during the billy bonus, 15 medals are paid out. (See FIG. 8), the billy bonus ends. In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to “C_C bell” is displayed along the winning determination line, the timing of “don”-“don”-“don” is whatever the timing of pressing the stop button. The symbol combination is not displayed along the invalid line.

  “C_C bell” or the like in the present embodiment indicates a specific example of the second internal winning combination. That is, the second internal winning combination has a specified number (15) exceeding the specified number (14) that triggers the end of the bonus game when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed along the winning determination line. It is an internal winning combination where medals are paid out. Furthermore, the combination of specific symbols (“don”-“don”-“don”) is an internal winning combination that is not displayed along a straight line (invalid line) other than the winning determination line in the frame of the display window.

  In the present embodiment, when “33” to “37” are acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, the first internal winning combination and the second internal winning combination are won. When “33” or “34” is acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, the symbol combination display corresponding to the second internal winning combination is displayed as the symbol combination corresponding to the first internal winning combination. The symbol combination corresponding to the second internal winning combination is displayed. As a result, the billy bonus ends without displaying the combination of specific symbols in the current game.

  On the other hand, when “35” to “37” are acquired as the small combination / replay data pointer, the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the first internal symbol combination is the symbol combination corresponding to the second internal symbol combination. The symbol combination corresponding to the first internal winning combination can be displayed in preference to the display. As a result, if the stop button is pressed at a predetermined timing in the current game, a combination of specific symbols is displayed, and the billy bonus ends.

  In the present embodiment, when “35” to “37” are acquired as the small role / replay data pointer during the billy bonus, that is, when a combination of specific symbols can be displayed along the invalid line, In the ART lottery, the lottery value of the bonus ART lottery table (see FIGS. 136 and 137) is set so as to always win some “ART”. That is, when the combination of specific symbols can be displayed along the invalid line during the billy bonus, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

  By the way, in the internal lottery with reference to the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state, when the winning number “6” (abbreviation “F_Billy Chance Bell”) is won, “38” is acquired as the data pointer for the small role / replay. Then, when “38” is acquired as the data pointer for the small combination / replay, “C_Billy medium combination 3”, “C_Billy medium combination 4”, “C_control bell 1”, etc. are determined as the internal winning combination. (See FIG. 30).

  When the symbol combination (“Bell”-“Don”-“Yamabuki”) corresponding to “C_Billy Medium 3” is displayed along the winning determination line during the billy bonus, one medal is paid out. (See FIG. 11). In addition, when the symbol combination corresponding to “C_Billy Medium 3” is displayed along the winning determination line, “Don” − “Don” − “ The symbol combination “don” is not displayed along the invalid line.

  When the symbol combination (“Bell”-“Don”-“Snow Mountain”) corresponding to “C_Billy Medium 4” is displayed along the winning line during the billy bonus, one medal is paid out. (See FIG. 11). Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to “C_Billy Medium 4” is displayed along the winning determination line, “Don” − “Don” − “ The symbol combination “don” is not displayed along the invalid line.

  When the symbol combination (“Bell”-“Rip 1”-“Yamabuki”) corresponding to “C_Control Bell 1” is displayed along the winning determination line during the billy bonus, one medal is paid out. (See FIG. 9). Further, when the symbol combination corresponding to “C_Control Bell 1” is displayed along the winning determination line, “Don” − “Don” − “Don” regardless of the timing of pressing the stop button. The symbol combination “” is not displayed along the invalid line.

  “C_Billy medium combination 3”, “C_Billy medium combination 4”, “C_control bell 1”, and the like in the present embodiment are specific examples of the third internal winning combination. That is, the third internal winning combination is a medal with a number (1) or less of the prescribed number (14) that triggers the end of the bonus game when the corresponding symbol combination is displayed along the winning determination line. Is an internal winning combination to be paid out. Furthermore, the combination of specific symbols is an internal winning combination that is not displayed along a straight line (invalid line) other than the winning determination line in the frame of the display window.

  In the internal lottery with reference to the internal lottery table for the RB3 gaming state, for example, when “losing” is determined, in this embodiment, a reel that prioritizes the display of the “don” symbol along the winning determination line. Perform stop control. Note that the reel stop control according to the present invention includes stop control based on a table that defines the number of sliding pieces (so-called table control) and stop control that preferentially stops and displays a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination ( So-called control control), and stop control serving as both of these two.

  As shown in FIG. 7, during the billy bonus in which the number of inserted medals is defined as one, the internal winning combination corresponding to the symbol combination of “don”-“don”-“don” is not defined. Therefore, even if the symbol combination “Don”-“Don”-“Don” is displayed along the winning determination line during the billy bonus, the operation of “C_Don BB” is not started.

  In the present embodiment, when “losing” is determined during the billy bonus, that is, when a combination of specific symbols is displayed along the winning determination line, it is necessary to always win some “ART” in the ART lottery. The lottery values in the bonus ART lottery table (see FIGS. 136 and 137) are set. That is, when the combination of specific symbols is displayed along the winning determination line during the billy bonus, a privilege advantageous to the player is given.

  As described above, in this embodiment, when the first internal winning combination or the second internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination during the billy bonus, the billy bonus ends in the game (one game). . When “33” or “34” is acquired as the small role / replay data pointer in the game (one game), a privilege advantageous to the player cannot be obtained. Therefore, the game during the billy bonus is played with a sense of tension, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  If the third internal winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination during the billy bonus, the symbol combination of “don”-“don”-“don” is not displayed along the invalid line. As long as the prescribed number (14) of medals that trigger the end of the bonus game is not paid out, the bonus game can be continued. As a result, in a subsequent game, a combination of specific symbols can be displayed, so that the player's expectation of obtaining an advantageous privilege is maintained and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, when the result of the internal lottery is “losing”, a combination of specific symbols is displayed along the winning determination line, and no medal is paid out. However, it is possible to obtain a privilege advantageous to the player, continue the bonus game, and enhance the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, the first internal winning combination “C_Billy Medium 1” and “C_Billy Medium 2”, and the third internal winning combination “C_Billy Medium 3” and “C_ The symbols of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C in the symbol combination corresponding to the billy middle role 4 "are the same. That is, the left reel 3L symbol in the symbol combinations corresponding to “C_Billy medium role 1” to “C_Billy medium character 4” is “Bell”, and the symbol of the middle reel 3C is “Don”.

  Thus, when the third internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the third stop operation is performed on the right reel 3C, the first internal winning combination is stopped until the symbol provided on the right reel 3C is stopped and displayed. A player can have a sense of expectation that a symbol combination corresponding to a combination is displayed. As a result, the interest of the game can be enhanced.

In the present embodiment, when a combination that can display a symbol combination of “Don”-“Don”-“Don” along an invalid line is determined (“35” to “Replay data pointers” 37 ”is acquired), a benefit (ART winning) advantageous to the player is given. That is, if the combination that can display the symbol combination “don”-“don”-“don” along the invalid line is determined, the symbol combination “don”-“don”-“don” is invalid. Even if it is not displayed along the line, a privilege (ART winning) advantageous to the player is given.
However, as the gaming machine of the present invention, when a symbol combination of “Don”-“Don”-“Don” is displayed along the invalid line, a privilege advantageous to the player (ART winning) is given. It may be configured.

  The gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention has been described above including the effects thereof. However, the present invention is not limited to the embodiments described herein, and it goes without saying that various embodiments are included without departing from the gist of the present invention described in the claims.

  For example, in this embodiment, when G_ART winning information is stored in the sub storage area, D_ART or B_ART is interrupted and G_ART is started. However, G_ART according to the present invention may be executed simultaneously with D_ART or B_ART. In this case, during G_ART, the continuous stock lottery and the extra game number lottery are performed, and the ART game number is not subtracted. Alternatively, an ART lottery of G_ART and an ART lottery of D_ART or B_ART may be performed.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachislot (game machine), 2 ... Exterior body, 2a ... Cabinet, 2b ... Front door, 3L ... Left reel, 3C ... Middle reel, 3R ... Right reel, 4 ... Display window, 11 ... Liquid crystal display device, 16 ... Start lever, 17L ... Left stop button, 17C ... Middle stop button, 17R ... Right stop button, 21L, 21R ... Character decoration part, 23L, 23R ... Touch sensor, 41 ... Main control circuit, 42 ... Sub control circuit, 51 ... Main CPU 81 ... Sub CPU

Claims (2)

An input operation detecting means for detecting an input operation of the game medium;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player based on detection of the input operation by the input operation detecting means;
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination with a predetermined probability based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Fluctuation display means that is constituted by a plurality of display rows, and that variably displays symbols necessary for the game based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detection means,
A stop operation detecting means for detecting a stop operation when the player presses an operation portion provided for each of the plurality of display rows;
Based on the determination result of the internal winning combination determining means and the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means, stop control means for stopping the variation display of the symbol,
A game medium providing means for providing a game medium based on a symbol combination displayed along a winning determination line extending over the plurality of display columns by stopping the variable display in the plurality of display columns;
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in a low RT gaming state in which the probability of determining an internal winning combination relating to replay by the internal winning combination determining means is a predetermined value, the internal winning combination relating to replaying is determined by the internal winning combination determining means. RT gaming state transition means for transitioning to a high RT gaming state where the probability of determining a combination is higher,
The internal winning combination determination means, as the internal winning combination, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination of the application of a predetermined number of game media greater than the number of inserted game media and less specific than the number of inserted game media A number of specific roles related to the granting of game media
When the first predetermined combination, the second predetermined combination, and the specific combination are determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means determines that the stop operation order for the plurality of display columns is the first stop In the case of the order, the symbol combination corresponding to the first predetermined combination is stopped and displayed, and when the order of the stop operation is the second stop order, the pressing timing of the operation unit with respect to the changing display row is predetermined. If it is the timing, the symbol combination corresponding to the second predetermined combination is stopped and displayed, and the special symbol combination to which no game medium is given is stopped and displayed if the timing of pressing the operation unit with respect to the changing display row is not the predetermined timing. When the order of the stop operation is the third stop order, the symbol combination corresponding to the specific combination is stopped and displayed.
The RT gaming state transition means shifts to the low RT gaming state when a symbol combination corresponding to the specific combination is stopped and displayed along the winning determination line. The predetermined number is greater than the number of games that are input to play a game,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific number is smaller than the input number.

Images